introduction to pcs 7 os 2 3 operator station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in simatic manager 3 configuring...

230
Preface, Contents PCS 7 OS 1 Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration 2 Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures – Basics 6 Creating Process Pictures – Advanced 7 Alarm System Settings 8 Archiving Options 9 Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes 10 Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring 11 Using the Server-to-Server Communication 12 Using other Editors and Tools 13 Index SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Operator Station Configuration Manual Edition 03/2003 A5E00164212-01

Upload: vokhue

Post on 21-Jul-2018

243 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface, Contents

PCS 7 OS 1Introduction to PCS 7 OSconfiguration 2Configuring PCS 7 OS Datain SIMATIC Manager 3Configuring the OS Datain PCS 7 OS 4

Setting the User Authorizations 5Creating Process Pictures– Basics 6Creating Process Pictures– Advanced 7

Alarm System Settings 8

Archiving Options 9Downloading a Project andConfiguring Changes 10Time Synchronization andLifebeat Montioring 11Using the Server-to-ServerCommunication 12

Using other Editors and Tools 13Index

SIMATIC

Process Control System PCS 7Operator Station

Configuration Manual

Edition 03/2003A5E00164212-01

Page 2: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Copyright © Siemens AG 2003 All rights reserved

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or itscontents is not permitted without express written authority.Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rightscreated by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,are reserved.

Siemens AGBereich Automation and DrivesGeschaeftsgebiet Industrial Automation SystemsPostfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg

Disclaimer of Liability

We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement withthe hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot beprecluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessarycorrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions forimprovement are welcomed.

©Siemens AG 2003Technical data subject to change.

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00164212-01

Safety Guidelines

This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and

connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and

graded according to severity by the following texts:

! Dangerindicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if properprecautions are not taken.

! Warningindicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if properprecautions are not taken.

! Cautionindicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Cautionindicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Noticedraws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to aparticular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are

defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and

systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Correct Usage

Note the following:

! WarningThis device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the

technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers

which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installedcorrectly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI® and SIMATIC NET® are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.

Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might

infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Page 3: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 iii

Preface

Purpose of Manual

This manual contains complete information for configuring the PCS 7 OperatorStation, the operator control and monitoring system of PCS 7, hereinafter referredto as the PCS 7 OS or OS. The manual serves both as an instruction manual and areference manual.

Basic Knowledge Requirements

The PCS 7 OS configuration manual is a reference manual and a guide for personsinvolved in the following:

• Configuration of PCS 7

• Commissioning and service of PCS 7

• Special OS configuration

The PCS 7 OS configuration manual is intended primarily for advanced users ofSIMATIC PCS 7.

Scope of Manual

The OS configuration manual is applicable to the software on the CD "ProcessControl System PCS 7 Engineering Toolset V 6.0."

Read Me

Refer to the Read Me file for the latest information (that may be more up-to-datethan the information in this manual):

• The Read Me file can be found on the CD "Process Control System PCS 7Engineering Toolset V 6.0."

• You can also access the Read Me file after you have installed PCS 7 using theStart > Simatic > Product Notes > English > PCS 7 Read Me menucommand.

Page 4: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationiv A5E00164212-01

Guide to Manual

Configuration steps are described in the order that enables fast and efficientconfiguration of your system. The manual provides important backgroundinformation and interrelationships for all of the configuration steps in order to clarifytheir significance and context in the overall system. Some of the configurationsteps are mandatory, while others represent options that can be used to optimizeyour configuration. The summary tables at the outset of the manual indicate whichconfiguration steps must be performed in every case and which can be performedfor additional optimization.

Procedures are uniformly described for all operating instructions using menucommands in the menu bar . For many of the functions, you also have the option ofusing commands in the shortcut menu for the individual objects.

Additional Documentation

For some topics, the documentation below provides additional information beyondwhat is included in this configuration manual.

• WinCC Help: This online Help system provides additional support for some ofthe settings and configurations. WinCC Help can be accessed by doing one ofthe following:

- Clicking "?" in the menu bar

- Clicking the "Help" button in the dialog.

• Process Control System PCS 7; Runtime manual: This manual providesdetailed information on operator control and monitoring during processoperation.

• Process Control System PCS 7; Configuration and Authorization manual:This manual contains information on hardware and software requirements andconfiguration options for a PCS 7 OS.

• Process Control System PCS 7 Engineering System configuration manual:This manual contains detailed information on working with the engineeringsystem.

A cross-reference is provided to the appropriate manual or online Help system ininstances where they offer further information.

Conventions

All essential documents can be found on the CD "Electronic Manuals forProcess Control System PCS 7."

Page 5: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 v

Further Support

If you have any technical questions, please get in touch with your Siemensrepresentative or agent responsible.

http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner

Training CentersSiemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with BATCH flexibleand the Process Control System PCS 7. Please contact your regional trainingcenter or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details:

Telephone: +49 (911) 895-3200.

Internet: http://www.sitrain.com

Page 6: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationvi A5E00164212-01

A&D Technical SupportWorldwide, available 24 hours a day:

Beijing

Nuernberg

Johnson City

Worldwide (Nuernberg)

Technical Support

24 hours a day, 365 days a year

Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222

Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223

E-Mail: [email protected]

GMT: +1:00

Europe / Africa (Nuernberg)

Authorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 to 17:00

Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222

Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223

E-Mail: [email protected]

GMT: +1:00

United States (Johnson City)

Technical Support andAuthorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:00 to 17:00

Phone: +1 (0) 423 262 2522

Fax: +1 (0) 423 262 2289

E-Mail: simatic.hotline@

sea.siemens.com

GMT: -5:00

Asia / Australia (Beijing)

Technical Support andAuthorization

Local time: Mon.-Fri. 8:30 to 17:30

Phone: +86 10 64 75 75 75

Fax: +86 10 64 74 74 74

E-Mail: adsupport.asia@

siemens.com

GMT: +8:00

The languages of the SIMATIC Hotlines and the authorization hotline are generally German and English.

Page 7: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 vii

Service & Support on the InternetIn addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the internet at:

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

where you will find the following:

• The newsletter, which constantly provides you with up-to-date information onyour products.

• The right documents via our Search function in Service & Support.

• A forum, where users and experts from all over the world exchange theirexperiences.

• Your local representative for Automation & Drives via our representativesdatabase.

• Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under "Services".

Page 8: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Preface

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationviii A5E00164212-01

Page 9: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 ix

Contents

1 PCS 7 OS 1-1

1.1 PCS 7 OS Overview..........................................................................................1-11.2 Primary Editors for Configuring the PCS 7 OS .................................................1-21.3 Operator Stations and Project types in PCS 7..................................................1-31.3.1 Overview of Operator Stations in PCS 7...........................................................1-31.3.2 Overview of Different Project Types in PCS 7 ..................................................1-31.3.3 Configuring a Single-User Project.....................................................................1-41.3.4 Configuring a Multi-User Project .......................................................................1-41.3.5 Configuring a Redundant System .....................................................................1-4

2 Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration 2-1

2.1 Configuration Steps Overview...........................................................................2-12.2 Configuration Steps in SIMATIC Manager........................................................2-12.3 Configuration Steps in WinCC Explorer............................................................2-3

3 Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager 3-1

3.1 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................3-13.1.1 Hardware Configuration Overview ....................................................................3-13.1.2 Configuration of PC Station...............................................................................3-23.1.2.1 How to Use the Commissioning Wizard............................................................3-33.1.3 Inserting and Configuring a PCS 7 OS .............................................................3-63.1.3.1 How to Create a PCS 7 OS...............................................................................3-63.1.3.2 How to Set the Properties of the PCS 7 OS .....................................................3-93.1.3.3 How to Specify a Target OS and a Standby OS.............................................3-103.2 Configuring the Communication Channels .....................................................3-123.2.1 Configuring Network Connections for a PCS 7 OS.........................................3-123.2.1.1 How to Configure an OS Network Connection................................................3-123.2.1.2 How to Check and Modify the Configuration...................................................3-143.3 Global and Specific Settings ...........................................................................3-153.3.1 Global and Specific Settings Overview ...........................................................3-153.3.2 Global Setting Options ....................................................................................3-153.3.3 Specific Setting Options ..................................................................................3-163.3.4 Defining the Plant Designation........................................................................3-163.3.4.1 How to Specify Settings for the Plant Designation..........................................3-173.3.5 Specifying the OS Area Identifier ....................................................................3-183.3.5.1 How to Specify the OS Area Identifier ............................................................3-193.3.6 Effect of Picture Hierarchy on the Picture Tree Manager ...............................3-203.3.6.1 How to Define Adoption of the Picture Hierarchy............................................3-213.3.6.2 How to Specify a Picture Name ......................................................................3-213.4 Further Work for the OS Configuration ...........................................................3-223.4.1 Work Overview................................................................................................3-223.4.2 Setting Up the AS-OS Assignment .................................................................3-223.4.2.1 How to Make the AS-OS Assignment .............................................................3-233.4.3 Inserting Pictures in the Plant Hierarchy.........................................................3-243.4.3.1 How to Insert Pictures .....................................................................................3-24

Page 10: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationx A5E00164212-01

3.4.4 Function and Creation of Block Icons .............................................................3-253.4.5 Sequence for Creating Block Icons.................................................................3-263.4.5.1 How to Specify Creation of Block Icons ..........................................................3-273.4.5.2 How to Specify the Block Icon Type................................................................3-273.4.5.3 How to Create and Update Block Icons ..........................................................3-283.4.6 Changing Unit and Operating Texts................................................................3-293.4.7 Adapting the Unit and Operating Texts...........................................................3-293.4.7.1 How to Edit the Texts in a Block Type ............................................................3-303.4.7.2 How to Edit Texts of Block Instances..............................................................3-323.4.8 Configuring Messages ....................................................................................3-333.4.8.1 How to Configure User-Specific Messages ....................................................3-333.4.9 Expanding the Event Text of a Message ........................................................3-353.4.9.1 How to Create an Explanatory Event Text......................................................3-353.4.9.2 How to Delete Additional Information from the Standard Event Text .............3-363.4.10 Specification of Message Priorities .................................................................3-373.4.10.1 How to Specify the Message Number Range .................................................3-373.4.10.2 How to Specify a Message Priority .................................................................3-383.5 Update Routine Settings .................................................................................3-393.5.1 Updating an OS Area Identifier and Picture Name .........................................3-393.5.1.1 How to Prevent Changes in the Picture Tree Manager ..................................3-393.6 Compiling the OS Data ...................................................................................3-403.6.1 Compiling the OS Server ................................................................................3-403.6.2 Type of Data to be Compiled ..........................................................................3-413.6.2.1 How to Compile an Individual OS ...................................................................3-423.6.2.2 How to Compile Multiple Operator Stations ....................................................3-42

4 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4-1

4.1 Working with WinCC Explorer...........................................................................4-14.2 Editors in WinCC Explorer ................................................................................4-24.3 OS Properties....................................................................................................4-24.3.1 Properties of the Operator Station Overview ....................................................4-24.3.2 Setting the Project Properties ...........................................................................4-24.3.2.1 How to Work in the Project Properties Dialog...................................................4-34.3.3 Setting the Computer Properties.......................................................................4-34.3.3.1 How to Work in the Computer Properties Dialog ..............................................4-54.4 Working with the OS Project Editor...................................................................4-64.4.1 OS Project Editor Overview ..............................................................................4-6

5 Setting the User Authorizations 5-1

5.1 User Authorizations Overview...........................................................................5-15.2 User Authorizations and PCS 7 ........................................................................5-25.3 Setting User Authorizations...............................................................................5-35.4 Using a Chip Card.............................................................................................5-45.5 User Authorizations in the Different Editors ......................................................5-55.5.1 How to Make Settings for User Authorizations .................................................5-6

Page 11: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 xi

6 Creating Process Pictures – Basics 6-1

6.1 Process Pictures in the PCS 7 OS....................................................................6-16.2 Graphics Designer Overview ............................................................................6-26.3 Graphics Designer Options ...............................................................................6-26.3.1 Different Objects in the Graphics Designer.......................................................6-26.3.2 Types of Dynamic Updating ..............................................................................6-36.3.3 Tag Connection and Tag Selection Dialog .......................................................6-46.3.4 Configuring and Storing Tags in WinCC...........................................................6-66.3.5 Dynamic PCS 7 Standard Objects....................................................................6-76.3.6 Dynamic User-Created Objects ........................................................................6-86.3.7 Configuration Steps for Dynamic Objects Overview.........................................6-86.3.7.1 Step 1 – How to Open a Picture in the Graphics Designer...............................6-96.3.7.2 Step 2 – How to Insert a Dynamic Object .........................................................6-96.3.7.3 Step 3 – How to Configure a Dynamic Object ................................................6-106.3.7.4 Step 4 – How to Specify the Object Properties...............................................6-126.4 How to Use Standard Objects in PCS 7 .........................................................6-126.4.1 Principal PCS 7 Standard Objects Overview..................................................6-126.4.2 Working with a Status Display.........................................................................6-126.4.2.1 How to Configure a Status Display .................................................................6-136.4.3 Extended Status Display Overview.................................................................6-146.4.4 Working with the Status Display (Extended)...................................................6-156.4.4.1 How to Determine the Bit Number from VSTATUS ........................................6-166.4.4.2 How to Prepare the Extended Status Display.................................................6-166.4.4.3 How to Insert an Extended Status Display......................................................6-176.4.4.4 How to Configure an Extended Status Display...............................................6-186.4.4.5 How to Make the Tag Connection...................................................................6-196.4.5 Working with the Analog Display (Extended)..................................................6-196.4.5.1 How to Insert an Extended Analog Display.....................................................6-206.4.5.2 How to Configure an Extended Analog Display..............................................6-206.4.5.3 How to Make the Tag Connection for the Analog Display ..............................6-216.4.6 Working with Input/Output Fields ....................................................................6-216.4.6.1 How to Configure an Input/Output Field..........................................................6-216.4.7 Group Display Overview .................................................................................6-226.4.8 Displaying a Group Display during Process Operation...................................6-236.4.8.1 How to Insert a Group Display ........................................................................6-236.4.9 Connect Group Display to PCS 7 Tag Structure.............................................6-256.4.9.1 How to Connect a Group Display to a Measuring Input..................................6-266.4.10 Connecting the Group Display to a Picture.....................................................6-276.4.10.1 How to Connect a Group Display to a Picture ................................................6-286.4.10.2 How to Define the Type of Picture Selection ..................................................6-29

Page 12: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationxii A5E00164212-01

7 Creating Process Pictures – Advanced 7-1

7.1 Additional Options for Creating Process Pictures Overview.............................7-17.2 Function and Use of Faceplates .......................................................................7-27.2.1 Using Faceplates...............................................................................................7-27.2.2 Relationship between Faceplates and Block Icons ..........................................7-37.2.3 Block Icons and the "@@PCS7Typicals" File ..................................................7-47.2.4 Block Icons and the "@Template.pdl" File........................................................7-57.2.5 Display Types of Faceplates .............................................................................7-57.2.6 Editing Faceplates – Faceplate Designer .........................................................7-67.2.7 Overview of Working with Block Icons and Faceplates ....................................7-67.2.7.1 How to Insert a Block Icon ................................................................................7-77.2.7.2 How to Connect Block Icons to a Measuring Point ...........................................7-77.2.7.3 How to Connect Any Object to a Faceplate ......................................................7-87.3 Displaying Alarm Messages..............................................................................7-97.3.1 Using a Message Window – Alarm Control ......................................................7-97.3.1.1 How to Insert an Alarm Control .........................................................................7-97.4 Using and Creating User Objects....................................................................7-117.4.1 Using and Creating User Objects....................................................................7-117.4.2 Advantages of User Objects as Compared to Single Objects ........................7-127.4.2.1 Configuration Steps for User Objects Overview .............................................7-137.4.2.2 Step 1 – How to Create a User Object............................................................7-137.4.2.3 Step 2 – How to Configure a User Object.......................................................7-147.4.2.4 Step 3 – How to Assign Property Parameters ................................................7-157.4.2.5 Step 4 – How to File a User Object.................................................................7-167.4.2.6 Step 5 – How to Insert a User Object .............................................................7-167.4.2.7 Step 6 – How to Edit a User Object ................................................................7-187.5 Working with User Object Templates..............................................................7-197.5.1 Using and Creating User Object Templates ...................................................7-197.5.2 Comparing User Objects and User Object Templates....................................7-207.5.3 Properties in User Object Templates ..............................................................7-207.5.4 User Object Templates and the Graphic Object Update Wizard ....................7-217.5.5 Wizards for Importing and Exporting Picture Objects .....................................7-217.5.6 Procedure for Importing and Exporting in the

Graphic Object Update Wizard .......................................................................7-237.5.7 Wizard for Picture Object Updates..................................................................7-247.5.8 Wizard to Modify a Tag Connection................................................................7-247.5.8.1 How to Create a User Object Template ..........................................................7-257.5.8.2 How to Work with the Graphic Object Update Wizard ....................................7-277.6 Using Picture Windows ...................................................................................7-287.6.1 Using a Picture Window..................................................................................7-287.6.1.1 How to Use a Picture Window.........................................................................7-297.7 Working with Cross-reference Lists ................................................................7-317.7.1 Using the Process Object View in PCS 7 OS .................................................7-317.7.2 General Information – Cross-Reference Lists.................................................7-317.7.3 Using Cross-Reference Lists in PCS 7 OS.....................................................7-327.7.4 Comparing Process Object View and Cross-Reference Lists ........................7-337.7.4.1 Step 1 – How to Create a Cross-Reference List.............................................7-347.7.4.2 Step 2 – How to Switch to a Point of Application ............................................7-347.7.4.3 Step 3 – How to Make Corrections .................................................................7-357.8 Using the Picture Tree Manager .....................................................................7-367.8.1 Function of the Picture Tree Manager ............................................................7-367.8.2 Calculating the Group Display Hierarchy ........................................................7-37

Page 13: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 xiii

8 Alarm System Settings 8-1

8.1 Alarm System Overview....................................................................................8-18.2 OS Project Editor Settings ................................................................................8-28.2.1 Settings for the Alarm System in the OS Project Editor....................................8-28.3 Settings in the 'Alarm Logging' Editor ...............................................................8-38.3.1 Settings for the Alarm System in Alarm Logging ..............................................8-38.3.2 Relationship between Alarm Logging and PCS 7 .............................................8-48.3.3 Using Message Lists during Process Operation ...............................................8-48.3.4 Properties of Message Lists..............................................................................8-58.3.5 System Message Types Overview....................................................................8-58.3.5.1 How to Define Properties for Message Lists.....................................................8-68.4 Using and Configuring the Horn........................................................................8-78.4.1 Function of the Horn..........................................................................................8-78.4.2 Functioning of Signal Tags................................................................................8-88.4.3 Acknowledging Signals .....................................................................................8-88.4.4 Setting in the "Horn" Editor ...............................................................................8-98.4.5 Settings in the "Message Assignment" Tab ......................................................8-98.4.6 Settings in the "Signal Assignment" Tab.........................................................8-108.4.6.1 How to Configure a Horn.................................................................................8-10

9 Archiving Options 9-1

9.1 Archiving and Reports Overview.......................................................................9-19.2 Using Tag Logging ............................................................................................9-29.2.1 Archiving in Tag Logging Overview ..................................................................9-29.2.2 Properties of Tags for an Archive......................................................................9-39.2.2.1 Overview of an Archive Configuration Steps ....................................................9-39.2.2.2 Step 1 – How to Create a New Archive ............................................................9-39.2.2.3 Step 2 – How to Define Properties of an Archive..............................................9-49.2.2.4 Step 3 – How to Configure Archives .................................................................9-59.2.2.5 Step 4 – How to Define Tag Properties ............................................................9-69.3 Archive Values in Process Pictures ..................................................................9-79.3.1 Overview of Displaying Archive Values in Process Pictures ............................9-79.3.2 Trend Display and Configuration in Runtime ....................................................9-79.4 Working with the Online Trend Control .............................................................9-89.4.1 Function of Online Trend Control ......................................................................9-89.4.2 Tag Connection in Online Trend Control ..........................................................9-89.4.2.1 Configuration Steps for Online Trend Control...................................................9-89.4.2.2 Step 1 – How to Insert an Online Trend Control ...............................................9-99.4.2.3 Step 2 – How to Define an Online Trend Control..............................................9-99.5 Working with the Function Trend Control........................................................9-119.5.1 Function of the Function Trend Control f(x) ....................................................9-119.5.2 Tag Connection in Function Trend Control .....................................................9-129.5.2.1 Configuration Steps for Function Trend Control .............................................9-129.5.2.2 Step 1 – How to Configure a Setpoint Trend ..................................................9-129.5.2.3 Step 2 – How to Insert a Function Trend Control............................................9-139.5.2.4 Step 3 – How to Define a Function Trend Control ..........................................9-139.6 Using Alarm Logging.......................................................................................9-169.6.1 Message Archiving in Alarm Logging..............................................................9-169.6.1.1 How to Configure Archives in the Alarm Logging ...........................................9-169.7 Using the Report Designer..............................................................................9-179.7.1 Reports with the Report Designer Overview...................................................9-179.7.2 Layouts in the Report Designer.......................................................................9-179.7.3 Reports in the Report Designer.......................................................................9-18

Page 14: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationxiv A5E00164212-01

10 Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes 10-1

10.1 Meaning of the Server Data ............................................................................10-110.1.1 Generating and Downloading Server Data .....................................................10-110.1.1.1 How to Download Server Data........................................................................10-110.2 Downloading and Activating a Project ............................................................10-210.2.1 Overview of a Project Download.....................................................................10-210.2.2 Requirements for Complete Download ...........................................................10-210.2.3 Background Information on Compiling and Performing

a Complete Download.....................................................................................10-310.2.4 Background Information on "Download Changes" Function...........................10-510.2.5 Overview of Changes......................................................................................10-610.2.6 Changes in Project – Plant View.....................................................................10-610.2.7 Changes in Project – Component View ..........................................................10-710.2.8 Changes in Charts ..........................................................................................10-710.2.9 Changes in Blocks and Block Instances .........................................................10-810.2.10 Changes in WinCC Explorer ...........................................................................10-810.2.11 Changes Requiring the OS To Be in STOP mode..........................................10-910.2.11.1How to Download Multiple Operator Stations .................................................10-910.2.11.2How to Download a Single OS......................................................................10-1110.2.11.3How to Activate a Project ..............................................................................10-11

11 Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring 11-1

11.1 Setting the Time Synchronization ...................................................................11-111.1.1 Overview of Time Synchronization..................................................................11-111.1.2 Operation with Local Winter Time and GMT...................................................11-211.1.2.1 How to Set the Time System...........................................................................11-211.1.3 Using the Different Buses ...............................................................................11-311.1.4 Time Synchronization via Terminal Bus..........................................................11-311.1.5 Time Synchronization via Plant Bus................................................................11-411.1.6 Options for Time Synchronization ...................................................................11-411.1.7 Time Synchronization via an External Timer ..................................................11-511.1.7.1 How to Synchronize via an External Timer .....................................................11-511.1.8 Time Synchronization via Domain Controllers ................................................11-611.1.8.1 How to Synchronize via a Domain Controller .................................................11-711.1.9 Redundancy in Time Synchronization.............................................................11-811.2 Setting the Lifebeat Montioring .......................................................................11-911.2.1 Overview of Lifebeat Monitoring......................................................................11-911.2.2 Display of Lifebeat Monitoring during Process Operation.............................11-1011.2.2.1 How to Configure Lifebeat Monitoring...........................................................11-10

12 Using the Server-to-Server Communication 12-1

12.1 Using Server-to-Server Communication .........................................................12-112.2 Server Spanning Tag Connections .................................................................12-112.2.1 Interconnecting Tags of Different OS Servers ................................................12-112.2.2 Example Configuration for Tag Connection ....................................................12-212.2.2.1 How to Configure Pictures with Different Tags ...............................................12-312.3 Using an Archive Server .................................................................................12-412.3.1 Configuring a Central Archive Server..............................................................12-412.3.2 Example Configuration for an Archive Server.................................................12-512.3.2.1 How to Configure an Archive Server...............................................................12-612.3.2.2 How to Configure Changes for an Archive Server ..........................................12-8

Page 15: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 xv

13 Using other Editors and Tools 13-1

13.1 Function and Use of the Text Library..............................................................13-113.1.1 Function of Text Library ..................................................................................13-113.1.2 Relationship between "Compile OS" and Text Library....................................13-213.1.2.1 How to Change the Unit and Operating Texts in the Foreign Languages ......13-313.2 Programming with Scripts ...............................................................................13-413.2.1 Function of Global Script.................................................................................13-413.2.2 Global Script – Programming with C Script.....................................................13-413.2.3 Global Script – Programming with VB Script ..................................................13-513.2.4 Programming with VBA ...................................................................................13-513.3 More Tools Overview ......................................................................................13-613.3.1 Additional Tools in PCS 7 OS .........................................................................13-6

Index 1

Page 16: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Contents

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Stationxvi A5E00164212-01

Page 17: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 1-1

1 PCS 7 OS

1.1 PCS 7 OS Overview

The use of a PCS 7 OS offers a major advantage compared to stand-aloneoperation of WinCC. That is, the integration of PCS 7 enables data that werecreated in SIMATIC Manager to be accessed in the PCS 7 OS.

Plant Hierarchy Basis

You specify the hierarchy of your plant in SIMATIC Manager. Important functions ofthe PCS 7 OS are based on this plant hierarchy as follows:

• During process operation, the plant hierarchy is shown in the overview area.From this area, the plant operator can quickly select other areas for display inthe work area.

• You insert pictures appropriate to your plant configuration in the planthierarchy. The OS is configured based on this hierarchy. The picture anddirectory names you assign in the plant hierarchy are automatically entered inthe OS. This enables you to manage your process pictures transparently.

The plants and plant sections from the plant hierachy correspond to the OS areasof the PCS 7 OS.

Process Pictures

You are assisted in a variety of ways when creating process pictures:

• PCS 7 provides various operator-controllable and observable blocks for use incontinuous function charts (CFC), for example, as well as preconfigureddisplays or so-called block icons. PCS 7 automatically inserts these block iconsin the process pictures.

• PCS 7 provides so-called faceplates to enable the plant operator toconveniently visualize and control measuring points.

• In addition, the objects you insert in process pictures can be easily and directlyinterconnected with the inputs/outputs of blocks you used when creatingcontinuous function charts (CFC), for example.

• PCS 7 wizards conveniently assist you in making objects dynamic in processpictures.

Page 18: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station1-2 A5E00164212-01

1.2 Primary Editors for Configuring the PCS 7 OS

PCS 7 OS provides various editors that can be used to make settings for the OS.The editors you will use in the course of your configuration activities are brieflypresented below:

Graphics Designer

In the Graphics Designer, you create process pictures that are displayed to theplant operator on the operator station and are used for process control. PCS 7provides a function for use when creating process pictures that automaticallyinserts all block icons (clear, graphical representations of measuring points) in theprocess picture. In addition, you can insert other graphics objects and provide themwith required dynamic responses. As a simple example, you can visualize thecurrent status of a valve so that the plant operator sees immediately whether or notthis valve is in "closed" or "open" state.

Tag Logging

The "Tag Logging" editor is an important tool for achiving measured values. In TagLogging, you can create various archives individually and assign them the processvalues you want to archive. This enables you to define an archive that iscustomized to your requirements. You also have the option to have the values youarchive in Tag Logging displayed during process operation. The configuration canbe made both in Graphics Designer and directly during process operation.

Picture Tree Manager

The Picture Tree Manager is used to reevaluate and update the hierarchy of thegroup displays.

User Administrator

The "User Administrator" editor assists you in creating higher-level user groups andindividual users for which you can define certain authorizations. You specify theseauthorizations for the OS areas that have been specified in the plant hierarchy inSIMATIC Manager.

Block List Editor

The Block List editor displays all of the blocks that you inserted in continuousfunction charts (CFC) during ES configuration. You must have performed the"Compile OS" function for this. A special picture can be assigned to a block in theBlock List editor. This enables the plant operator to go directly from the messagelist to this picture using the "Loop-in-Alarm" function. If you do not assign a specialpicture, the "Loop-in-Alarm" function automatically calls the associated faceplate.

Page 19: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 1-3

1.3 Operator Stations and Project types in PCS 7

1.3.1 Overview of Operator Stations in PCS 7

The two different types of operator stations in PCS 7 are:

• OS servers

• OS clients

OS Servers

An OS server is connected to the PLCs and receives the process data. An OSserver does not have an operator control and monitoring function. By using morethan one OS server, you have the option to distribute data to multiple servers. Forexample, for a large plant, you can store a plant section on each OS server.Advantages of distributed systems are:

• Good scalability

• Isolation of plant sections

• Higher availability as a result of good scalability and isolation of plant sections

PCS 7 provides the option for an OS server to simultaneously access several otherOS servers.

OS Clients

OS clients are used during process operation for operator control and monitoring.OS clients access the OS server data and display these data, enabling the processto be controlled. Data from more than one OS server can be shown in a processpicture displayed on the OS client.

OS clients provide the option to connect two, three, or four process monitors foreach client. This requires the use of multi-VGA cards.

1.3.2 Overview of Different Project Types in PCS 7

The different project types in PCS 7 OS are:

• Single-user project

• Multi-user project

• Redundant project

These project types are specified in SIMATIC Manager during hardwareconfiguration in HW Config. You do not make any other settings for this in thePCS 7 OS.

For additional information, refer to the Process Control System PCS 7,PC Configuration and Authorization manual.

Page 20: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station1-4 A5E00164212-01

1.3.3 Configuring a Single-User Project

There is one OS for a single-user project. The ES and the OS are normallyconnected to the plant bus via a communications processor, or CP. In small plants,the ES and OS can be operated on one computer.

The configuration is performed in the ES. If the ES and OS are not operated onone computer, the configuration data are downloaded from the ES to the OS whenthe configuration is completed. The project data are manipulated and stored on theOS.

1.3.4 Configuring a Multi-User Project

There is at least one OS server and more than one OS client for a multi-userproject:

• Up to 32 OS clients can be operated by one OS server.

• An OS client can access up to 12 servers, which can be configuredredundantly.

The OS server must no longer be used for operator control and monitoring in amulti-user project.

Configuration and Data Storage

In PCS 7, the configuration is performed exclusively in the ES and thendownloaded to the OS servers. All configuration data are managed centrally andstored in the PCS 7 project. Project data such as pictures, tags, and archives arestored on the OS server and provided to the OS clients. The OS server implementsthe connection to the plant bus and processes the process data. Operator controlof the process takes place on the OS clients.

1.3.5 Configuring a Redundant System

In a redundant configuration, the OS server is configured redundantly. Each OSclient can access a maximum of 12 redundant server pairs. If multi-VGA cards areused in the OS clients, permitting multiple process monitors to be connected foreach OS client, the number of clients per server pair is correspondingly less.

Detailed information can be found in the following manuals:

• Process Control System PCS 7; PC Configuration and Authorization

• Process Control System PCS 7, Fault-Tolerant Process Control Systems

Page 21: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 1-5

Redundancy Principles

During process operation, OS server pairs run completely parallel and independentof one another. If one of the OS servers in a server pair fails, an equivalentredundant OS server is always available. The OS servers monitor each otherduring runtime.

Each OS server has its own process connection and it own data archive. Processdata and messages from the PLCs are sent to both redundant OS servers and areprocessed and adjusted appropriately. Communication between the redundant OSservers takes place via terminal bus.

Failure and Recovery of an OS Server

In the event of an OS server failure, a control system message is output, and thefunctioning server receives and archives the process values and messages of thePLCs. The OS clients are automatically switched from the failed OS server to theredundant peer server. After a brief switchover time, all operator stations are againavailable.

After recovery of the failed server, the archive is adjusted for the failure time period.As a result, two equivalent servers are available again.

The archive adjustment is implemented in the background and operates in parallelto process control and archiving of WinCC. Thus, operator control and monitoringof the plant is guaranteed at all times.

Page 22: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station1-6 A5E00164212-01

Page 23: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 2-1

2 Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration

2.1 Configuration Steps Overview

The operator station is configured in several incremental steps. During theconfiguration process, settings are made in the following areas of PCS 7:

• SIMATIC Manager

• WinCC Explorer

Normally, the PCS 7 OS is completely configured in the engineering system so thatall of the configuration data can be managed in one central location.

Depending on the requirements of your project, some of the incrementalconfiguration steps are mandatory, while others are optional. Refer to the tables todetermine which configuration steps are required and which are optional.

2.2 Configuration Steps in SIMATIC Manager

An overview of the individual configuration steps that must be performed inSIMATIC Manager is presented in the tables below. In addition, the summarytables provide the recommended sequence for the individual configuration steps.Detailed information is provided for each configuration step.

Hardware and Connection Configuration

Configuration Operations Mandatory Optional

Inserting and configuring a PCS 7 OS X

If additional operatorstations arerequired. The PCS 7Wizard automaticallycreates a PCS 7 OS.

Configuration of network connectionsfor a PCS 7 OS

X

Page 24: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station2-2 A5E00164212-01

Other Relevant Configuration Steps for the PCS 7 OS

Configuration Operations Mandatory Optional

Inserting pictures in the plant hierarchy X

AS-OS assignment X

Generation of block icons X

Changing unit and operating texts X

Configuration of messages X

If messages otherthan standardmessages are to bedefined

Defining the range of messagenumbers

X

Defining the message priorities X

Important formessages in themessage line in theoverview area

Defining the plant designation X

Defining the OS area identifier X

Plant hierarchy

X

Operator control andmonitoring attributes

Defining the picture names and picturehierarchy

X

If picture namesother than standardmessages are to bedefined

Settings for updating:

• AS-OS connections

• OS area identifier

X

Compiling the OS X

After Completion of All Configuration Operations

Configuration Operations Mandatory Optional

Downloading the OS X

Page 25: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 2-3

2.3 Configuration Steps in WinCC Explorer

An overview of the individual configuration steps performed in WinCC Explorer ispresented in the tables below. In addition, the summary tables provide therecommended sequence for the individual configuration steps. Detailed informationis provided below for each configuration step.

Configuration Operations Mandatory Optional

Setting the object properties X

Setting the computer properties X

Definitions in the OS project editor X

If settings other thanstandard settings areto be defined

Setting up user rights X

Displaying a system – basic principles:

• Inserting dynamic objects

• Using a status display

• Using an extended status display

• Inserting an input/output field

• Configuring a group display

X

Use of desiredobjects

Displaying a system – advanced:

• Using faceplates and block icons

• Creating user objects

• Creating user object templates

• Using picture windows

• Using process object view andcross-reference lists

X

These optionsprovide supportwhen processpictures are created

Working out the group displayhierarchy

X

Alarm system settings:

• Definitions in the project editor

• Settings in Alarm Logging

• Configuration of message lists

• Configuration of Horn

X

Configuring archives and protocols X

Settings for:

• Time synchronization

• Lifebeat monitoring

X

Directly on the OS servers/OSclients after downloading theproject:

Activating the project

X

Page 26: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Introduction to PCS 7 OS configuration

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station2-4 A5E00164212-01

Page 27: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-1

3 Configuring PCS 7 OS Data inSIMATIC Manager

3.1 Hardware Configuration

3.1.1 Hardware Configuration Overview

The configuration of your system is mapped in SIMATIC Manager and HW Config.You have the option of configuring different project types in the PCS 7 OSaccording to your system structure, that is, you can configure systems with one ormore OS servers or clients. Normally, you will work with a multi-user project, thatis, you will create several OS servers and OS clients.

Information on project types in the PCS 7 OS can be found under "PCS 7 OS >Project Types in PCS 7".

You also have the option to configure redundant operator stations. This requiresthat both the target and standby OS be defined in addition to the normal settings.

Overview of Individual Steps during Hardware Configuration

This overview presents the recommended sequence of individual configurationsteps and indicates the part of the program where the configuration operations areperformed:

Program Location Action

Commissioning Wizard Configure PC station

SIMATIC Manager Insert all of the operator stations in the project as a PCstation

HW Config Insert WinCC application and hardware componentsassociated with the respective PCS 7 OS.

SIMATIC Manager Configure properties of the PCS 7 OS

• Name the OS

• Define the target and standby OS

Page 28: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-2 A5E00164212-01

Additional Information

Additional information on configuring a project is provided in the following manuals:

• Process Control System PCS 7; Engineering System configuration manual

• Process Control System PCS 7; Fault-Tolerant Process Control Systemsmanual

• Process Control System PCS 7; PC Configuration and Authorization manual

3.1.2 Configuration of PC Station

In order to test the overall functionality of the PCS 7 OS from the PCS 7 ES withoutfirst downloading real data to the individual operator stations, the PCS 7 ES mustbe configured as a PC station.

The configuration in the components configuration tool and HW Config must matchfor all PCs:

The following settings must be identical:

• Order of slots

• Name of PC

• Address of CPs

Page 29: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-3

Requirement

To facilitate your work, you should make a configuration list containing the correctconfiguration for each PC.

Example:

Name of PC MAC Address ofNetwork Module

Slot in Virtual Rack Module/Application

ES_PC 1 WIN application

4 CP1613

08.00.06.12.34.56 5 CP network card orapplication

… … … …

Commissioning Wizard

The Commissioning Wizard is automatically called after the PCS 7 is installed. Youcan use the Commissioning Wizard to configure a PC station. The CommissioningWizard is called only once immediately after the installation.

Additional information on installing a PCS 7 PC can be found in theProcess Control System PCS 7; PC Configuration and Authorization manual.

3.1.2.1 How to Use the Commissioning Wizard

1. Click "Next" in the "Configuration of PC Station" dialog.

Note

The order of modules to be configured depends on the order in which the insertedcommunications modules were detected in the PC.

2. Make the following settings for the modules that are connected to the plant busin the "Configuration of PC Station" dialog:

- Select the "Use module in configured PC station for productive operation"option.

- Select the "Activate ISO protocol only" option.

- If you use a SIMATIC CP for the input/output to the terminal bus, makesure that the MAC address provided is unique from all others in thenetwork.

Page 30: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-4 A5E00164212-01

3. You can make the following settings for the modules connected to the terminalbus in the "Configuration of PC Station" dialog:

- Select the "PG operation" option.

- Select the "IP protocol is being used" option.

4. Click "Next."

5. Make the following setting in the "Configuration of PC Station" dialog:

- Clear the "SIMATIC NET OPC server in configured PC station" option.

6. Click "Next" in the "Save Module Configuration" dialog.The settings are applied.The following message is displayed:"If changes were made to the component configuration or componentproperties, the entire PC will be reconfigured and the existing database will belost!"

7. Click "OK" to confirm the message.

8. You can call the Configuration Wizard in the "Configuration" dialog:

If … … Then

You want to create a new project on thePCS 7 ES but the project alreadycontains the ES as a PC station

Click the "Configuration Wizard" button.

The Commissioning Wizard is notopened on a PCS 7 ES, or you want toperform this step at a later time

Click "Next" in the "Configuration" dialog.

The following message is displayed:"The access point of the application is set to 'S7ONLINE (STEP7) � PCinternal (local)'."

9. Click "OK" to confirm the message.

10. In the "Configuration Wizard" dialog, select the "Create new configuration"option and click "Next."

11. Enter the name of the project in the "Create New Project" dialog.

12. If you want to edit the project with a PC that was just installed, select the"Create copy of local PC station" and click "Next."

Page 31: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-5

13. You can make default settings for the project or the PC station in the "ModifySettings" dialog.

Additional information on the subsequent configuration can be found in the ProcessControl System PCS 7; Engineering System configuration manual.

14. Click "Finish."This closes the dialog.

15. Select the "Do not use symbol file" option for "Symbols" in the dialog.The "Use symbol file" option is only relevant for projects in which PROFInetand SIMOTION are used.

Page 32: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-6 A5E00164212-01

16. Click "Finish" in the "Completion of SIMATIC NET Commissioning Wizard"dialog.The "Configure PC Station" dialog is displayed.

3.1.3 Inserting and Configuring a PCS 7 OS

As a general principle, each PCS 7 OS is managed as a SIMATIC PC station inSIMATIC Manager. The following objects are always included:

• WinCC application

• OS

If you used the wizard to create a PCS 7 project, one PCS 7 OS is normallyinserted. Additional operator stations must be inserted manually.

Once you have created a PCS 7 OS, you must configure it in SIMATIC Manager.This involves defining the target OS and – if you are working with redundantoperator stations – the standby OS. The path information for the target OS is usedto define where the OS data are to be downloaded.

3.1.3.1 How to Create a PCS 7 OS

If you did not use the wizard to create a PCS 7 OS when you created the project,you can use the following procedure to create OS servers, OS clients, andredundant operator stations.

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select the project in which you want to insert an OS.

3. Select the Insert > Station > SIMATIC PC Station menu command.A PC station is now inserted.

Notice

If you want to create an OS, you must first insert a SIMATIC PC station. Once thisis done, you can continue with the configuration.

Page 33: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-7

Setting Up the Hardware Configuration

1. Select the "PC station" object in the tree structure and double-click the"Configuration" object in the detail view.HW Config is displayed.

2. If the hardware catalog is not visible, select the View > Catalog menucommand.This displays the hardware catalog.

3. Insert the required hardware components:

- Underneath the "SIMATIC PC Station > CP Industrial Ethernet" entry,select the communications processor contained in the PC station andmove it to the PC station using a drag and drop operation.

- If you are using a standard network card, select the "IE General"processor.

The "Properties – Ethernet Interface" dialog is displayed, and the "Parameter"tab is active.

4. Enter the following settings for the IP address of the CP:

If ... … Then

The CP 1613 is inserted as a networkmodule

• Set MAC address

• Set ISO protocol

A network card is connected on the plantbus via BCE

• Set MAC address

• Set ISO protocol

• Set name in "General" tab

• In the "Keep Alive for SendingConnections" area in the "Options"tab, set the "interval" to "30".

Notice

You must use the ISO protocol for all operator stations communicating withredundant automatization systems. Note that the same protocol must always beused for all network modules connected to a plant bus.

To achieve the best performance, avoid using TCP/IP and ISO protocolssimultaneously in a plant.

Note

• If you are using the "ISO" protocol, set the MAC address.

• If you are using the "TCP/IP" protocol, set the TCP/IP address.

Page 34: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-8 A5E00164212-01

5. In the "Subnet" area, select the subnet that is to be used for communicationbetween the AS and OS:

If … … Then

A subnet has not yet been set up … Click "New" and define a newnetwork.

A subnet has already been set up … In the "Subnet" area, select therequired network.

6. Click "OK" to save your input.The CP is now inserted in the PC station.

7. Select the required WinCC application in the hardware catalog underneath the"HMI" entry.

If … … Then

You want to insert an OS server Select WinCC Application

You want to insert an OS client Select WinCC Application Client

You want to insert a redundant OS Select WinCC Application (stby)

Page 35: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-9

8. Select the Station > Save menu command.

- This saves your settings.

- An OS is automatically created in the background, which is then displayedin SIMATIC Manager. You can make additional configuration settings forthis OS in WinCC Explorer.

OS server

OS client

Redundant OS

9. Repeat steps 1 to 7 to insert additional operator stations.

Notice

The settings and names assigned in HW Config must be identical to those in thecomponents configuration tool. Also ensure that the use of upper and lower caseare identical in both cases.

3.1.3.2 How to Set the Properties of the PCS 7 OS

You can make the following settings for the PC station and the PCS 7 OS:

• Name of PC station

• Name of OS

How To Assign a Name to the PC Station and the OS

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select which object you want to name:

- PC station

- OS

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command.The "General" tab of the "Properties – SIMATIC PC Station" dialog isdisplayed.

Page 36: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-10 A5E00164212-01

4. Make the following settings:

- Enter the required name in the "Name" field.Take care to assign brief, self-explanatory names that reference thefunction of the PC station in the overall system.

- Fill in the "Author" field, if desired.

- Fill in the "Comment" field, if desired.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The name of the PC station or the OS is now updated in the tree structure, andall other specifications are saved.

3.1.3.3 How to Specify a Target OS and a Standby OS

The settings you make in the "Properties – SIMATIC PC Station" dialog depend onwhether you have a single OS or a redundant OS:

If … … Then

You have a single OS • You must specify the target OS

You have a redundant OS • You must specify the target OS as the master OS

• You must also specify the standby OS

Requirements

The following requirements must be met for you to make settings for the target OSand standby OS:

• All of the required operator stations must be created in SIMATIC Manager.

• Network connections must be configured for all target and standby operatorstations using basic Windows functions.

How To Make Settings for a Target OS

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select which OS you want to define as a target OS.

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command.The "Properties – [Name of OS]" dialog is opened.

4. Select the "Target OS and Standby OS" tab.

5. Click "Browse" next to the "Path to target OS computer" and enter the path tothe *.mcp file of the target OS.The target OS computer is the computer where the project is to run. The *.mcpfile is automatically generated when the OS is created.

Page 37: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-11

Notice

Enter the path to the target OS without a preceding drive letter:

\\[Name of Server]\[Directory Name]\...\

6. If you have a redundant OS, you select which OS is to be used as a standbyOS from the "Standby OS" drop-down list.All of the standby operator stations that you have created in SIMATIC Managerare displayed in this drop-down list.

7. Click "OK" to save your inputs.This implements your settings for the target OS.

Notice

If you create a redundant operator station, you must also perform the settingsdescribed above for the associated standby OS.

How To Make Settings for a Standby OS

1. In the tree structure, select which OS is to be used as a standby OS.

2. Repeat steps 3 to 7 from the "Settings for the Target OS."

Note

Make the settings for the standby OS exactly the reverse of those for the targetOS.

3. Click "OK" to save your inputs.This implements your settings for the standby OS.

Page 38: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-12 A5E00164212-01

3.2 Configuring the Communication Channels

3.2.1 Configuring Network Connections for a PCS 7 OS

The communications connections for PC stations are configured in NetPro. Alloperator stations must have already been created in SIMATIC Manager.

You must configure the following connections:

• OS – AS

• ES – AS

When you configure connections, always start with the OS to avoid configurationerrors.

3.2.1.1 How to Configure an OS Network Connection

Requirement

All of the operator stations and PLCs have been inserted in the SIMATIC Manager,and the associated CPs have been inserted and configured in HW Config.

Opening NetPro

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. Select the Options > Configure Networks menu command.NetPro is opened, and all of the SIMATIC stations you have inserted aredisplayed.

OS – AS Connection1. Select the WinCC application on the OS for which you want to configure a

network connection.The connection table is displayed in the lower pane of the window.

2. Place the cursor in the first blank row of the connection table, and select theInsert > New Connection menu command.The "Insert New Connection" dialog is displayed.

3. In the tree structure, select the CPU containing the data to be displayed on theOS as the connection partner.

4. Select the required connection from the "Connection" drop-down list:

If … … Then

You want to establish a connection to a"plain" station

Select S7 connection

You want to establish a connection to an Hstation

Select fault-tolerant S7 connection

Page 39: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-13

5. Select the "Display Properties Before Inserting" check box, if desired.This gives you the opportunity to make settings or changes to the connection.

6. Click "OK."

7. Enter the name for the connection in the "Local ID" column.

8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 for all other operator stations.

ES – AS Connection

You are responsible for configuring this connection.

1. Select the ES for which you want to configure a network connection.The connection table is displayed in the lower pane of the window.

2. Place the cursor in the first blank row of the connection table, and select theInsert > New Connection menu command.The "Insert New Connection" dialog is displayed.

3. In the tree structure, select the CPU as the connection partner.The associated data are displayed in the lower part of the dialog.

4. Select the required connection from the "Connection" drop-down list.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The dialog is closed.

6. Enter the name for the connection in the "Local ID" column.

Notice

Make sure that the OS – AS and ES – AS connections have the same name.

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for all remaining PLCs.

Downloading Stations

1. Select the required stations.

2. Select the PLC > Download to Current Project > Selected Stations menucommand.

The online Help system (accessed by clicking "Help") contains additionalinformation on this dialog.

Page 40: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-14 A5E00164212-01

3.2.1.2 How to Check and Modify the Configuration

Checking the Configuration

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select the required SIMATIC PC station.

3. Select the Edit > Open Object menu command.This opens HW Config.

4. In the Start menu, double-click the icon below to open the ComponentConfigurator.

5. Check that the list entries are the same in HW Config and the ComponentConfigurator. Make any necessary corrections.

Modifying the Configuration

1. If you are not using a SIMATIC CP for the input/output to the plant bus(Industrial Ethernet), use the following procedure:

- In HW Config, select the network module for the input/output to the plantbus.

- Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command.

- Select the "Options" tab.

- In the "Send Keepalives for Connections" area, set the intervals persecond to "30".

2. Select the Start > Simatic > SIMATIC NET > Settings > Set PC Stationmenu command.The "Set PC Station" dialog is displayed.

3. In the tree structure underneath "Modules," select the module you would like touse to establish a connection to the plant bus.

4. In the tree structure, select the "General" area and set the operating mode to"Configured operation."Parameters are now assigned to the CP.

5. Click "Apply."

6. In the tree structure underneath "Access points," select "S7ONLINE."

7. Select the Procedure > Properties menu command.

8. Set the "Assigned interface parameter assignment" to "PC internal (local)."

9. Click "OK" to confirm your inputs.

Page 41: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-15

3.3 Global and Specific Settings

3.3.1 Global and Specific Settings Overview

In addition to the hardware configuration, settings required to configure thePCS 7 OS must also be made in SIMATIC Manager. These settings are made intwo places:

• Global settings: These settings are made in the "Plant Hierarchy – Settings"dialog. These settings apply to the entire project.

• Specific settings: These settings are made in the "Properties – HierarchyFolder" dialog, "Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab. The settings apply onlyto the selected hierarchy folder.

Both options are presented in the description of the various settings.

3.3.2 Global Setting Options

Global settings apply to the entire project. These settings are used to specifycertain automatic functions so that PCS 7 automatically assigns plant designations,OS area identifiers, and picture names.

Options for Settings

The following settings can be made:

• Plant designation , or higher-level item designation (HID) – Use the "Includedin HID" setting to specify that the HID is automatically formed from the namesof the hierarchy folders.

• OS area identifier – Use the "OS Area" setting to define the selected level asthe OS area and to accept it in the area identifier. An OS area must be definedfor area-specific reporting during process operation.

• Base picture hierarchy on plant hierarchy – This transfers the picture hierarchyfrom the plant view to the Picture Tree Manager of the PCS 7 OS.

Use the "Options > Plant Hierarchy > Settings" command to open the dialog wherethe settings are made. The online Help system (accessed by clicking "Help")contains additional information on this dialog.

Page 42: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-16 A5E00164212-01

3.3.3 Specific Setting Options

The specific settings made in the "Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab of theobject properties are important for process control by the plant operator. You canuse these attributes to modify the global settings for individual hierarchy folders, inparticular. These settings are made in the plant view of SIMATIC Manager.

Options for Settings

Settings for control and monitoring attributes can be used to influence the following:

• Plant designation, or higher-level item designation (HID)

• OS area identifier

• Picture names

Use the "Edit > Object Properties" command to open the dialog where the settingsare made. The online Help system (accessed by clicking "Help") containsadditional information on this dialog.

3.3.4 Defining the Plant Designation

The plant designation, or higher level item designation (HID), is used to provideunique identifiers for parts of the plant according to their function. The HID has ahierarchical structure corresponding to the plant configuration.

The HID is important when you create a tag connection for dynamic objects in theGraphics Designer of WinCC Explorer, since the HID is part of the tag name.

Global Setting

It is possible for the names of hierarchy folders to be automatically accepted in theHID. As a result, the HID consists of the names of the various hierarchy folders, forexample:

"[NameofHierarchyFolderLayer1]\[NameofHierarchyFolderLayer2]"

You can influence which hierarchy level is to be applied to the HID as well as thenumber of characters in each section from SIMATIC Manager. Specifications madein the plant hierarchy are applied to the object properties for control and monitoringattributes.

Note

To ensure that designations are consistent over the entire project, take care to usea suitable designation for the hierarchy folder in the plant view during ESconfiguration. Make sure that the number of characters in the hierarchy foldername does not exceed the number of characters specified for the HID. Namesthat have more characters than the specified number are only partially displayedin the HID.

Page 43: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-17

Specific Setting – "Control and Monitoring Attributes"

In the object properties of the "Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab, you specifywhether the name of a particular hierarchy folder is to be inserted in the HID orremoved. The hierarchy levels defined in the plant hierarchy as "Included in HID"are always taken into account when the HID is created.

3.3.4.1 How to Specify Settings for the Plant Designation

You have two options for making plant designation, or higher level item designation(HID), settings:

• Global setting

• Specific setting – Control and monitoring attributes

Global Setting

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder that displays the plant.

3. Select the Options > Plant Hierarchy > Settings menu command.

4. In the "Number of Hierarchy Levels" text box, enter the number of hierarchylevels in your project.

5. Enter a numerical value in the text box in the "Max. No. of Characters" column.This value determines the length of the hierarchy folder name.The more hierarchy levels you have in your project and the more levels youwant to include in the higher level designation, the fewer characters that shouldbe specified as the maximum number in order to maintain clarity in your projectwork.

6. In the "Included in HID" column, select the check boxes for the levels that areto be included in the HID.

7. If you wish to separate the names of individual levels from one another withinthe HID, select the required check boxes in the "With Separators" column.The "Preview" field shows you the general structure of the HID.

8. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 44: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-18 A5E00164212-01

Specific Setting – "Control and Monitoring Attributes"

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder for which you want to make aspecific setting.

3. Select the Edit > Properties menu command, and switch to the "Control andMonitoring Attributes" tab.

4. Make the setting for the "Name of hierarchy folder is part of the HID" checkbox:

If … … Then

The hierarchy folder is not to be acomponent of the HID

Clear the check box

The hierarchy folder is to be acomponent of the HID

Select the check box

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.Based on your setting, the name of the hierarchy folder is either removed fromthe HID or added to the HID.

3.3.5 Specifying the OS Area Identifier

OS areas result from the plant structure created in SIMATIC Manager, that is, oneplant section in SIMATIC Manager corresponds to one OS area. An area identifiercan be defined for these areas. The default setting for the area identifiercorresponds to the name of the hierarchy folder in the plant hierarchy.

Defining the area identifier has the following effects:

• Process operationThe plant operator can select particular areas and view the associated processpictures. Only messages relating to the area currently selected are displayed.The messages are output in the message row in the "Area" column.

• ConfigurationDuring configuration in the ES, the areas are displayed in the object propertiesof a hierarchy folder in the "Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab.

• Compile OSWhen the OS is compiled, these OS areas are placed in the "Area" user textblock in Alarm Logging.In addition, the OS areas are entered in the Picture Tree Manager.

• User authorizationsIn a large plant, the plant operator is assigned different areas so that duringprocess operation, he can view and operate only those areas for which he hasauthorization. In addition, when the message list is opened, messages aredisplayed for only those areas for which he has authorization. This ensures ahigher level of operator security.

Page 45: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-19

Global Setting

The global setting is used to specify the hierarchy levels that are to apply as OSarea levels. According to this specification, the name of the hierarchy folder thatbelongs to this level is automatically entered in the various locations as the OSarea identifier.

Note

When the OS is compiled, the OS areas are transferred to the Picture TreeManager. As a general principle, the hierarchy levels are displayed starting withthe hierarchy level that was defined as the OS area.

Specific Setting – "Control and Monitoring Attributes"

The OS area identifier can be modified for the individual hierarchy folders. Thisrequires that the hierarchy folder be located in the level that was specified as theOS area. The OS area identifier that is being modified is forwarded to all lower-level hierarchy folders, OS pictures, OS reports, and messages.

3.3.5.1 How to Specify the OS Area Identifier

Settings for the OS area identifier are made in two places:

• Global setting

• Specific setting – "Control and Monitoring Attributes"

Global Setting

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. Select the Options > Plant Hierarchy > Settings menu command.

3. In the "OS Area" column, select the Level option that is used as the OS area.

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 46: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-20 A5E00164212-01

Specific Setting – "Control and Monitoring Attributes"

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder for which you want to make aspecific setting.

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command, and switch to the"Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab.

4. Enter the new name in the "OS area identifier" field.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The OS area identifier applies to all lower-level objects in the hierarchy.

Notice

If you manually assign a different name for the OS area identifier and haveconfirmed the entry by clicking "OK," PCS 7 automatically selects the "Nomodification when renaming the hierarchy folder" check box. As a result, the OSarea identifier is not overwritten when the hierarchy folder is renamed.

3.3.6 Effect of Picture Hierarchy on the Picture Tree Manager

According to your plant configuration, pictures are inserted in the plant hierarchy inorder to display the process to the plant operator. You can insert one picture perhierarchy folder. Inserting pictures in the plant hierarchy results in a picturehierarchy that serves as an important aspect when managing process pictures.Once the OS is compiled, the Picture Tree Manager has the same hierarchy as theplant hierarchy.

Plant View and Picture Hierarchy in the Picture Tree Manager

In the plant hierarchy, you specify whether the pictures you inserted in the plantview are to be automatically transferred to the Picture Tree Manager. If you haveselected this setting, the OS area identifier in the Picture Tree Manager isautomatically updated each time a hierarchy folder is renamed in the planthierarchy.

Notice

The hierarchy levels are displayed starting with the hierarchy level that wasdefined as the OS area. The Picture Tree Manager shows only those hierarchyfolders in which a picture has been stored.

Page 47: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-21

Control and Monitoring Attributes and Picture Names

During runtime, the plant operator sees the picture names in the picture hierarchyof the OS. You can assign your own picture names for individual hierarchy folders,which are then transferred to the Picture Tree Manager when the OS is compiled.The default setting for the picture names corresponds to the name of the hierarchyfolder. You only have to make settings if you want to assign a name other than thedefault setting.

3.3.6.1 How to Define Adoption of the Picture Hierarchy

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. Select the Options > Plant Hierarchy > Settings menu command.

3. Select the "Base picture hierarchy on the plant hierarchy" check box.This transfers the picture hierarchy from the plant hierarchy to the Picture TreeManager when the "Compile OS" function is executed.

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Notice

If you have selected this option and then modify the picture hierarchy directly inthe Picture Tree Manager, the changes are overwritten when the OS isrecompiled.

3.3.6.2 How to Specify a Picture Name

Requirement

The "Base picture hierarchy on plant hierarchy" check box must be selected in theplant hierarchy settings. Otherwise, the fields are not active.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder for which you want to assignyour own picture name.

Note

You can only change picture names for those hierarchy folders below thehierarchy level defined as the OS area in the plant hierarchy.

Page 48: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-22 A5E00164212-01

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command, and switch to the"Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab.The name of the selected hierarchy folder is entered as the default name.

4. Enter your choice of name in the "Picture name for OS" field.

Notice

Do not use special language characters in picture names.

5. If you want to change the order of the pictures, click "Order."The online Help system (accessed by clicking "Help") contains additionalinformation on this dialog.

6. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Notice

If you have manually assigned a picture name and saved it by clicking "OK," thesystem automatically selects the "No modification when renaming the hierarchyfolder" check box. As a result, the name is not overwritten when the hierarchyfolder is renamed.

3.4 Further Work for the OS Configuration

3.4.1 Work Overview

You must perform the following preparatory work:

• Set the AS-OS assignment

• Insert pictures in the plant hierarchy

• Specify the option for creating block icons

• Enter multilingual unit and operating texts for faceplates

• Adapt the unit and operating texts

• Configure messages

3.4.2 Setting Up the AS-OS Assignment

The AS-OS assignment of a hierarchy folder in the plant view of SIMATIC Managerresults in the following in the component view:

• All continuous function charts (CFC) and sequential function charts (SFC)inserted in the plant view are placed in the chart folder of the assigned AS.

• All pictures and reports inserted in the plant view are placed in the folder of theassigned OS.

Page 49: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-23

3.4.2.1 How to Make the AS-OS Assignment

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder for which you want to make theAS-OS assignment.

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command and switch to the "AS-OSAssignment" tab.

4. From the "Assigned AS" drop-down list, select the S7 program that you want toassign to the selected hierarchy folder.

5. If the lower-level objects have another assignment but you prefer all lower-levelobjects to have the same assignment, select the "Pass on selected assignmentto lower-level objects" check box.

Note

The "Pass on selected assignment to all lower-level objects" check box is onlyactive if the lower-level objects have another assignment or no assignment.

6. From the "Assigned OS" drop-down list, select the operator station you want toassign to the selected hierarchy folder.

7. If the lower-level objects have another assignment but you prefer all lower-levelobjects to have the same assignment, select the "Pass on selected assignmentto lower-level objects" check box.

Note

The "Pass on selected assignment to all lower-level objects" check box is onlyactive if the lower-level objects have another assignment or no assignment.

8. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The AS-OS assignment is accepted, and the lower-level objects are passed onor not passed on according to your setting.

Page 50: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-24 A5E00164212-01

3.4.3 Inserting Pictures in the Plant Hierarchy

To enable the plant operators to easily control and monitor the process on thePCS 7 OS, you can display the plant or a plant section using pictures.

These pictures are inserted in the plant hierarchy in order to produce a uniquehierarchical assignment. At the same time, the pictures in the component view areassigned to the appropriate OS. When pictures are inserted, you must bear in mindthat only one picture per hierarchy folder can be inserted. The Graphics Designer,an editor in the WinCC Explorer, must be used to configure the pictures and makethem dynamic.

3.4.3.1 How to Insert Pictures

Requirement

Before you insert a picture, you must assign the appropriate hierarchy folder to anOS.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder where you want to insert apicture.

3. Select the Insert > Technological Objects > Picture menu command.

If … … Then

An OS is already assigned to thehierarchy folder

The picture is inserted

An OS has not yet been assigned tothe hierarchy folder and your projecthas more than one operator station

A message dialog is displayed from whichyou can directly assign the OS

An OS has not yet been assigned tothe hierarchy folder and your projecthas only one operator station

The picture is inserted and the hierarchyfolder is automatically assigned to theexisting OS.

4. In the detail view, select the picture and then select the Edit > Rename menucommand.

5. Enter a name (as brief and unique as possible) and confirm by pressing theEnter key.The picture name is accepted.

Page 51: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-25

3.4.4 Function and Creation of Block Icons

Symbols referred to as block icons are used for operator control and monitoring ofplants or plant sections during process operation. Block icons are used for blockinstances that can be controlled and monitored by the operator from continuousfunction charts (CFC).

For each process picture, you must specify whether block icons are to be createdand placed in this process picture.

For example, you can view the process value (PV), setpoint (SP), and manipulatedvariable (OUT) for a closed-loop controller in the block icon. The block icon for aclosed-loop controller is displayed in a process picture as follows:

Block Icons in the Multiproject

The "Create/Update Block Icons" function also works well for multiprojects. Whenthis function is executed, block icons are created for all process pictures in themultiproject for which automatic block icon creation is defined. If block icons arecreated in a multiproject, the plant hierarchy and the individual folder names in allprojects of the multiproject must be identical, since the plant hierarchy does notoverlap the multiproject.

Block Icons and Faceplates

The "Create/update block icons" function automatically places the preassembledblock icons in the selected process pictures and makes them dynamic. Thisfunction can be used to update block icons following changes to continuousfunction charts (CFC).

Starting from a block icon in a process picture, the plant operator can open theassociated faceplate during process operation, which provides additional detailsand enables operator control of the block.

For additional information, refer to "Creating Process Pictures – Advanced >Relationship between Faceplates and Block Icons."

Page 52: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-26 A5E00164212-01

Multiple Block Icons for One Block

Some blocks require different block icon versions, for example, a valve can have ablock icon in both the vertical and horizontal mounted position. You specify whichicon is to be created in your process picture using a parameter that you input in theobject properties of the block instance. This parameter is the "Type" attribute of theblock icon.

To determine the value of the "Type" attribute, you must refer to the"@@PCS7Typicals" or "@PCS7Typicals" file. The "Type" attribute is found under"General" properties in the object properties of the block icon. This entry (forexample, "@valve/2") is assigned as the parameter in the block instance.

Information on this file can be found in "Creating Process Pictures – Advanced –Block Icons and @@PCS7Typicals File".

3.4.5 Sequence for Creating Block Icons

The following actions are performed to create block icons:

• The "Create/update block icons" function identifies all of the pictures for whichautomatic creation of block icons is planned.

• The "Create/update block icons" function identifies all of the continuousfunction charts (CFC) that are stored in the same hierarchy level as the pictureand in lower-level hiearchy levels.

Notice

If the function does not locate any continuous function charts (CFC) or blocks, allof the block icons are deleted from those pictures set for automatic creation ofblock icons.

• The charts are searched for blocks with the attribute "S7_m_c:=true", that is,blocks intended for operator control and monitoring.

• Data for creating block icons are determined from the above-mentioned blocksand placed in a temporary file. These data are used to place the block icons inthe associated pictures and make them dynamic, that is, they are linked to theassociated tags of the block instance so that their current values are alwaysdisplayed during process operation.

Page 53: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-27

3.4.5.1 How to Specify Creation of Block Icons

Requirements

A continuous function chart (CFC) must have been created and a picture insertedin a hierarchy folder in SIMATIC Manager.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the detail view, select the picture for which the PCS 7 is to automaticallycreate block icons.

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command, and switch to the "BlockIcons" tab.

4. Select the "Base block icons on the plant hierarchy" check box.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for all pictures where you want block icons to be createdautomatically.

Actual creation of block icons is described in "How To Create and Update BlockIcons".

3.4.5.2 How to Specify the Block Icon Type

1. Open the continuous function chart (CFC) in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Select the block for which you want to specify the block icon, and select theEdit > Object Properties menu command.The "Properties – Block" dialog is displayed, and the "General" tab is active.

3. In the "Special Object Properties" area, enter the value of attribute "Type" suchas "2" or "3" in the "Block Icon" field, so that the required block icon version iscreated.

Note

This attribute is located in the "@@PCS7Typicals.pdl" file. Enter the value withouta slash in front.

For information on this attribute, refer to "Creating Process Pictures – Advanced –Block Icons and @@ PCS7 Typicals File".

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 54: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-28 A5E00164212-01

3.4.5.3 How to Create and Update Block Icons

Block icons are created in two ways:

• By executing the "Create/update block icons" function

• During execution of the "Compile OS" function, by selecting the "Create/updateblock icons" option in Step 4 of the wizard.

Block icons are normally created using the "Create/update block icons" function.This method is described below:

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure of the project or multiproject, select the hierarchy foldercontaining the pictures where you want block icons to be created.

3. Select the Options > Plant Hierarchy > Create/Update Block Icons menucommand.The "Create/Update Block Icons" dialog is displayed. All of the pictures in thehierarchy folder and lower-level hierarchy folders for which you selected the"Create block icons" option in the object properties are displayed.

4. In the "Lower hierarchy levels included" drop-down list, select the number oflower-level hierarchy levels that are to be taken into account when the blockicons are created.

5. Click "OK" to execute the function.All of the block icons are placed in the corresponding process pictures.

Note

Once the block icons have been created/updated, compile the operator station sothat the required tags are created in the PCS 7 OS. This is necessary to ensurethat tag assignments in the process pictures of the PCS 7 OS are automaticallycorrected in the event that blocks or charts are changed or renamed.

Page 55: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-29

3.4.6 Changing Unit and Operating Texts

Faceplates, which display items such as measured values, operating limits, andunit and operating texts of the blocks, are used to display the process to the plantoperator during process operation. The texts are specified in the block types usedfor a continuous function chart (CFC).

For detailed information on faceplates, refer to "Creating Process Pictures –Advanced > Using Faceplates".

Special Features for Unit and Operating Texts

Unit and operating texts exist in only one language in the block types. English isthe standard language. For this reason, during process operation, the unit andoperating texts are only displayed in the language that is stored for the block typesin SIMATIC Manager, irrespective of the current language selection.

Unit and Operating Texts for Block Types

The unit and operating texts are stored in the object properties of the block types.In order to view the standard texts, you must open the object properties of theblock from a continuous function chart (CFC) and switch to the "Inputs/Outputs"tab. This tab contains the following columns:

• "Unit" and "Identifier" – These texts are used for displaying analoginputs/outputs.

• "Text 0" and "Text 1" – These texts are used for displaying the status of binaryinputs/outputs.

3.4.7 Adapting the Unit and Operating Texts

If you require unit and operating texts in multiple languages, you must adapt thespecified texts for the block types and/or block instances and enter the translationsin the "Text Library" editor of WinCC Explorer.

The following actions require a different procedure:

• Adapting texts for a block type

• Adapting texts for block instances

Requirement

All required languages must be installed.

Page 56: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-30 A5E00164212-01

Adapting Texts for a Block Type

Adapting texts for a block type offers a major advantage in that you only have toadapt the unit and operating texts once for the block type in the project library.Then, you can create block instances in continuous function charts (CFC) from theblock types in the project library. You do not have to adapt each individualinstance.

Caution

Be sure to create a separate project library. Copy all of the block types to beadapted to this project library.

Always make changes to the unit and operating texts for a block type at the startof configuration. If you have already created continuous function charts (CFC) inthe project, changes to unit and operating texts must be made in the individualblock instances.

Adapting Texts for Block Instances

If you have already created block instances in your project, you have to edit theseas an additional step. Block instances can be conveniently edited in the processobject view.

3.4.7.1 How to Edit the Texts in a Block Type

Notice

Make sure you place the block type in your project library before modifying theunit and operating texts.

Do not adapt block types if you have already created block instances.

Overview of Substeps

Step Action

A Preparation

B Change unit and operating texts in the "LAD/STL/FBD" editor

Page 57: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-31

Step A – Preparation

Since the "LAD/STL/FBD" editor does not show which inputs/outputs are providedwith unit and operating texts, you must perform the following preparations:

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select any view.

2. Create a continuous function chart (CFC) – this chart is used only as an aidand has nothing to do with the actual project.

3. Drag the block for which you want to change the unit and operating texts to thischart.

4. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command, and switch to the"Inputs/Outputs" tab.

5. Make a note of all of the inputs/outputs that have an entry in the "Identifier,""Text 0," and "Text 1" columns.Next you must edit these inputs/outputs in the "LAD/STL/FBD" editor.

Step B – Changing Unit and Operating Texts in the "LAD/STL/FBD" Editor

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select any view.

2. Select the Options > Display Language menu command, specify the requireddisplay language as the standard language, and click "OK" to confirm thesettings.

Caution

Bear in mind that each time you execute the "Compile OS" function, the "DisplayLanguage" is reset to the language you specified in Step 2.

3. Open the project library, and select the "[Name of project library]/S 7program/Blocks" folder in the tree structure.

4. In the detail view, select the required block.

5. Select the Edit > Open Object menu command.The "LAD/STL/FBD" editor is displayed for you to enter the unit and operatingtexts for the inputs/outputs.

6. Select the required input/output in the tree structure or the detail view.This will be one of the inputs/outputs that you noted previously.

7. In the shortcut menu, select Object Properties.The "Tag Properties" dialog is displayed.

8. Switch to the "Attributes" tab.

Page 58: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-32 A5E00164212-01

9. Change the values for the following attributes:

If … … Then

You want to change analog unit andoperating texts

• Select the S7_unit attribute

• Select the S7_shortcut attribute

You want to change binary unit andoperating texts

• Select the S7_string_0 attribute

• Select the S7_string_1 attribute

10. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

11. Repeat steps 6 to 9 to change additional unit and operating texts.

12. Close the "LAD/STL/FBD" editor.This changes the block type so that the modified unit and operating texts areautomatically included for each use of this block type from the library.

3.4.7.2 How to Edit Texts of Block Instances

Requirements

The desired connections must be activated in the "Parameter" column of the blockinstance properties for them to be displayed in the project object view.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the "Process Object view".

2. Switch to the "Parameters" tab.The data are updated.

3. In the "Filter by column" drop-down list, select the "Block type" entry.

4. Input the name of the block type, for example, "meas_mon", in the "Display"field.The data are filtered according to the selected filter criteria.

5. Depending on the type of text, select the required column and change the unitand operating texts.This changes the texts in the object properties of the block instances.

Page 59: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-33

3.4.8 Configuring Messages

Messages are important for process control by the plant operator. The process canbe monitored and evaluated using messages. Message texts and message classesare preset for block types. Examples of messages include "Actual value too high,""External error," and "Overdosage."

Messages are configured during ES configuration as part of creating continuousfunction charts (CFC). If you use a block with message characteristics in the CFC,for example, the "Dose [FB63]" block, certain message texts are preset with theassociated message class and type per the default setting. These messages aresent by the AS when the corresponding event occurs. You have the option ofadapting the message texts and attributes for your own requirements.

If … … Then

You want to change an individualblock instance in a CFC

Configure the messages directly in theblock instance in a CFC

You want to modify a block type inorder to create the instances of theblock type

Change the block type directly

Notice

Create a separate project library at the start of configuration.

Change the messages for a block type only at the start of configuration. If youhave already created continuous function charts (CFC) in the project, changes tomessages must be made in the individual block instances.

3.4.8.1 How to Configure User-Specific Messages

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. Select the Options > Display Language menu command, and select therequired standard language.

3. Perform the steps below according to whether you want to change a blockinstance or a block type:

Notice

If you have already created continuous function charts (CFC), changes tomessages must be made in the individual block instances.

Page 60: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-34 A5E00164212-01

If … … Then:

You want to change anindividual block instance

1. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folderwhere the required CFC is stored.

2. In the detail view, select the CFC and open it bydouble-clicking.

3. In the CFC, select the block for which you wantto change the message attributes or texts.

Alternatively, you can implement the message textsin the block instances in the process object view.

You want to change a blockin a project library

1. Open your project library.

2. In the tree structure, select the "[Name ofproject library]/S7 Program/Blocks" folder.

3. In the detail view, select the required block.

4. Select the Edit > Special Object Properties > Messages menu command.The "PCS 7 Message Configuration" dialog is opened, and the messagespreset for this block are displayed in table format.

5. Modify the preset message text in the "Event" column.

6. If you want the message to be acknowledged by the user, select the check boxin the "Single Acknowledgement" column for the relevant message.

7. Click "Save" to save your inputs.

Note

If you want to change the message text into other installed languages, you mustchange the "Display Language" and enter the messages in the respectivelanguage.

Repeat steps 2 to 8, selecting a different standard language in Step 2.

The online Help system (accessed by clicking "Help") contains additionalinformation on this dialog.

Page 61: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-35

3.4.9 Expanding the Event Text of a Message

During process operation, a message includes the following information:

Date Time Priority Origin Event

08.11.02 9:27:17.677 1 Plant1/RMT1/CFC_FC111/MEAS_MON Too high

Based on this standard message, the plant operator cannot immediately identifywhich characteristic is "too high". PCS 7 provides an option to add additionalinformation to the event text, such as "Reactor level," using block comments. Youcan enter the extended test individually for each block instance in a continuousfunction chart (CFC).

Function of Extended Event Text

The extended event text is controlled using the following two factors:

• So-called keyword

• Block comments

Each block has a standard defined event text. The keyword "$$BlockComment$$"is added at the front of the key word in PCS 7. If this keyword is present, the entryis read out in the "Comments" text box and displayed along with the event text inthe message during process operation.

3.4.9.1 How to Create an Explanatory Event Text

1. In SIMATIC Manager, open the continuous function chart (CFC) containing theblock instances to be adapted.

2. Select the required block and select the Edit > Object Properties menucommand.The "Properties – Block" dialog is displayed.

3. In the "Comments" text box, enter the explanatory text to be displayed inaddition to the event text.

4. Click "OK" to confirm your inputs.

Note

If you want to modify the block comments for a large number of block instances,you can do so quickly and conveniently in the process object view.

Select the "Messages" tab, and enter the explanatory text in the "BlockComments" column.

Page 62: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-36 A5E00164212-01

3.4.9.2 How to Delete Additional Information from the Standard EventText

If you do not require additional information for the event text and furthermore wantto avoid displaying the standard text, make this setting once for all block types.

Notice

Always place the block type in your project library before adapting it.

Do not adapt block types if you have already created block instances.

Proceed as follows...

1. Open SIMATIC Manager.

2. Select the File > Open… menu command.

3. Switch to the "Libraries" tab, select your project library, and click "OK."The project library is displayed.

4. Select the block type you want to adapt, and select the Edit > Special ObjectProperties > Message…. menu command.The "PCS 7 Message Configuration" dialog is displayed.

5. For all message texts in which additional text is not to be displayed, delete the"$$BlockComment$$" in the "Event" column.

6. Click "OK" to confirm your inputs.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all of the block types for which you want to make thissetting.

Page 63: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-37

3.4.10 Specification of Message Priorities

Every message has a defined priority. The priority is used to ensure that themessage line in the overview area always displays the message that meets thefollowing criteria:

• Not yet acknowledged

• Highest priority

In this way, important messages are never overwritten by unimportant messages.The plant operator can switch from the message line directly to the process picturewhere the interrupt is pending.

By default, the latest message is always the first message displayed in themessage list. You have the option to modify this setting in WinCC Explorer. Forexample, you can specify "Priority" as the sort criterion for a message list. Thisenables the plant operator to sort message lists during process operationaccording to priority in ascending or descending order.

You must specify the message priority separately for each individual message inthe block type or block instance. A total of 16 priorities are available, whereby 16represents the highest priority and 0 the lowest priority. If no priority is explicitlyspecified, the default setting is 0.

Note

Message priorities cannot be specified unless you have defined a "CPU-wideunique" message number range.

3.4.10.1 How to Specify the Message Number Range

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and switch to the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select the following folder:"[Name of Project]/[Name of CPU]/S7-Program/Blocks"

3. Select the Edit > Special Object Properties > Message Numbers... menucommand.The "Set message range" is displayed.

4. Select the required option:

Option Meaning

"Always assign unique CPU-widemessage numbers"

You must select this setting if you want tospecify message priorities for block typesand instances.

"Always assign unique project-wide"message numbers

You cannot specify message priorities withthis option.

5. Click "OK" to confirm your input.This resets the message number range for the entire project.

Page 64: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-38 A5E00164212-01

3.4.10.2 How to Specify a Message Priority

Message Priority for a Block Type

Notice

Create a separate project library at the start of configuration.

Then create the message priority in a block type before continuing theconfiguration.

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and open your project library.

2. Select the Special Object Properties > Message... menu commandThe PCS 7 Message Configuration dialog is displayed.

3. Switch to the "Priority" column, and position the cursor in the row containingthe message you want to change.

4. Select the required priority from the drop-down list.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to specify a priority for additional messages.

6. Click "OK."This stores your settings.

Message Priority for a Block Instance

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder where the required CFC isstored.

3. In the detail view, select the CFC and open it by double-clicking.

4. In the CFC, select the block for which you want to change the messageattributes or texts.

5. Select the Edit > Special Object Properties > Messages menu command.The "PCS 7 Message Configuration" dialog is opened, and the preset valuesfor this block are displayed in table format.

6. In the "Priority" column, change the priority setting for all required messages.

7. Click "Save" to save your inputs.This accepts the priorities for this block instance.

Note

If you want to change the message priorities for several block instances, open theprocess object view and change all required priorities in the "Priority" column.

Page 65: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-39

3.5 Update Routine Settings

3.5.1 Updating an OS Area Identifier and Picture Name

If you change an OS area identifier or rename a picture in the plant view, the areaidentifier or the picture name automatically changes in the OS when the "CompileOS" function is executed.

3.5.1.1 How to Prevent Changes in the Picture Tree Manager

The Picture Tree Manager automatically changes by default when a hierarchyfolder is renamed in the plant hierarchy. If you want to prevent the Picture TreeManager from being automatically changed, make the following settings:

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the plant view.

2. In the tree structure, select the hierarchy folder for which you want to make aspecific setting.

3. Select the Edit > Object Properties menu command, and switch to the"Control and Monitoring Attributes" tab.

4. Select the "No modifications when renaming the hierarchy folder" check box.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 66: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-40 A5E00164212-01

3.6 Compiling the OS Data

3.6.1 Compiling the OS Server

You must execute the "Compile OS" function when you have configured all of thedata in SIMATIC Manager and are starting to configure the OS data in WinCCExplorer. All of the data from SIMATIC Manager, such as tags, messages, andtexts as well as the hardware and connection configuration must be "made known"to the OS.

Depending on your requirements, PCS 7 offers three options for calling thisfunction:

If … … Then

You want to compile an individual OSspecifically

Select the OS in the component view ofSIMATIC Manager, and select the Compilecommand in the shortcut menu

You want to compile more than oneOS

Select the Options > OS > Compile menucommand

You want to compile and downloadmore than one OS

Select the multiproject or the project. Thenselect the PLC > Compile and DownloadObjects menu command. In the "Compileand Download Objects" dialog, you canselect the check boxes for the requiredoperator stations, make the compilationsettings, and start the compile anddownload operation.

Notice

If you are working within a multiproject, make sure to bring together all projects ofthe multiproject again before a complete compile operation.

In addition, make sure that the names of the S7 programs of the multiproject areunique from all others in the multiproject.

Page 67: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-41

3.6.2 Type of Data to be Compiled

During compilation, the following information is made known to the OS:

• Assignment of S7 programs to operator stations. This assignment is made inthe "Compile OS" wizard.

• Areas defined in SIMATIC Manager. These areas are important for properassignment of messages during process operation, for the picture hierarchy,and for assignment of user authorizations.

• Group display hierarchy

• Tags, messages, and texts that arise or are configured during creation ofcontinuous function charts (CFC). These objects must be compiled in order foryou to access them during OS configuration.

• Structure types created through the use of certain block types in continuousfunction charts (CFC)

• Sequential function charts (SFC) displayed for process operation. This enablesthe plant operator to monitor the process displayed in the form of sequentialfunction charts (SFC) during process operation.

• Structure for storing process pictures in the plant hierarchy, which is shown inthe form of the Picture Tree in WinCC

• Block icons created from the block types of a continuous function chart (CFC)

• Network connection parameters from NetPro

Note

Since not all of the characters in the ES configuration data are permitted to beincluded in a tag name in the OS, illegal characters are converted by replacingthem with "$".

The following characters are converted:[ ‘ ] [ . ] [ % ] [ \ ] [ * ] [ ? ] [ : ] [ space ]

Page 68: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-42 A5E00164212-01

3.6.2.1 How to Compile an Individual OS

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

Notice

If unit and operating texts for the block types were changed in the project library,make sure you have selected the correct "Display Language" setting.

2. In the tree structure, select which OS you want to compile.

3. Open the shortcut menu, and select Compile.The "Compile OS" Wizard is displayed and guides you step-by-step throughthe compilation process.This wizard is the same one that is displayed using the "Options > OS >Compile" function. However, when an individual OS is compiled, only thisparticular OS can be selected. All other operator stations are unavailable.

4. Proceed as described starting with Step 3 in "Configuring PCS 7 OS Data inSIMATIC Manager > Compiling OS Data > How to Compile Multiple OSServers".

3.6.2.2 How to Compile Multiple Operator Stations

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select any view (component view, plant view, orprocess object view).

Notice

If the unit and operating texts of the block types in the project library have beenchanged, make sure that your standard language is set as the "DisplayLanguage."

2. Select the Options > OS > Compile menu command.This opens a wizard that guides you step-by-step through the compilationprocess.

3. Step 1: You receive general information about the compilation.

4. Step 2: Assign the S7 programs to the appropriate OS.The OS servers require the S7 programs of all PLCs that you receive processdata from.When making this assignment, you can also assign S7 programs that belong toother projects of a multiproject. This assignment is required if the OS serverhas to access PLCs of other projects.

5. Step 3: Select the S7 programs and the associated network connections.This connection specifies the network connection that the OS server uses tocommunicate with the AS.

Page 69: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 3-43

6. Step 4: Select the type of data that are to be compiled.Here, you specify which data are to be compiled. If the plant operator is todisplay sequential function charts (SFC) during process operation, you mustselect the "SFC Visualization" check box.In addition, you specify the scope of the compilation data: "Entire OS" or"Changes only." For the first compile operation, you must always download theentire OS. Following changes, you can select the "Changes only" option.Information on downloading changes can be found in "Downloading a Projectand Configuration Changes – Implementing and Downloading Changes."

7. Step 5: Check the summary of the settings you specified in the individual steps.If necessary, use the "Back" button to switch to a prior step and makecorrections.

8. Step 5: Click "Compile."This compiles the OS data.

Page 70: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station3-44 A5E00164212-01

Page 71: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 4-1

4 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

4.1 Working with WinCC Explorer

Opening WinCC Explorer

The PCS 7 OS is configured in WinCC Explorer. The WinCC Explorer can beopened as follows:

Open the component view of SIMATIC Manager, select the required OS in the treestructure, and select the Edit > Open Object menu command.

WinCC Explorer and PCS 7

Caution

Avoid making any modifications in WinCC involving the plant structure created inSIMATIC Manager. SIMATIC Manager is the sole program for creating andmaintaining the plant structure. Otherwise, data may be overwritten or data maynot be updated when the "Compile OS" function is executed.

Additional Help in WinCC Explorer

Detailed information on the various editors available in WinCC Explorer can befound in WinCC Help. This online Help system can be accessed fromWinCC Explorer and from each individual editor.

Page 72: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station4-2 A5E00164212-01

4.2 Editors in WinCC Explorer

Various editors are available in the PCS 7 OS. The editors can be opened asfollows:

• In WinCC Explorer, select the "Editors > [Name of Editor] > Open" menucommand.

• In the left window pane, select the required editor and select the "Open"command in the shortcut menu.

Use of Editors in WinCC Explorer in the PCS 7 Environment

Various editors are available in WinCC Explorer. Some of the editors are usedintensively for OS configuration, while others are irrelevant in the PCS 7environment. This is due to the fact that data already specified through the ESconfiguration does not have to be manually configured. For example, the GraphicsDesigner is used frequently, while the Text Library is used only in exceptionalcases.

4.3 OS Properties

4.3.1 Properties of the Operator Station Overview

Specific properties must be set for each individual PCS 7 OS. These settings aremade in two dialoges:

• Project Properties – These settings apply to the overall OS project.

• Computer Properties – These settings apply to the OS opened from SIMATICManager.

4.3.2 Setting the Project Properties

Comprehensive project settings are made in the project properties:

• Update cycle – Use this setting to control how often a dynamic display isupdated during process operation, for example, a fill level display. The dialoglists all of the available standard update cycles. If your project requires otherspecific update cycles, you can define them here. If a display is inserted in theGraphics Designer, you can assign an update cycle to the display.

• Shortcut keys, or hot keys – You can specify shortcut keys for the followingthree functions that are used by plant operators during process operation:"Logon," "Logoff," and "Print."

Open the "Project Properties" dialog by selecting the project in the left windowpane and selecting the "Edit > Properties" menu command.

Page 73: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 4-3

4.3.2.1 How to Work in the Project Properties Dialog

1. In the navigation window in WinCC Explorer, select the "OS [Name of OS inSIMATIC Manager]" object and select the Edit > Properties menu command.The "Project Properties" dialog is displayed, and the "General" tab is active.

2. Apply the settings in the "General" tab.

3. Switch to the "Update Cycles" tab, and select an update cycle from the list.

4. Switch to the "Hot Keys" tab, and select an action in the "Actions" list.

5. Click in the "Previously assigned to" field. Using the keyboard, enter thekeystroke combination that is to be used to execute this action during processoperation.The new shortcut key is indicated.

6. Click "Assign" to confirm the shortcut key.

7. Click "OK" to save all inputs in the dialog.

For detailed information, refer to WinCC Help.

4.3.3 Setting the Computer Properties

Computer properties are used to define specific properties for a PCS 7 OS that areimportant for process operation.

Computer property settings are made in various tabs. The settings depend on theproject status, that is, different computer property settings are made during theconfiguration phase than for process operation.

Name of OS – "General" Tab

You do not have to make any settings in the "General" tab. The type and name ofthe computer are automatically entered. The name of the computer corresponds tothe name of the ES computer where you performed the configuration and isidentical to the that computer's name on the network. The name is stored under"System Properties" in the Windows Control Panel. This name is automaticallyreplaced with the name of the target computer when the project is downloaded tothe target computer.

Page 74: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station4-4 A5E00164212-01

Starting Applications – "Startup" Tab

Use the "Startup" tab to activate the applications required during process operationthat are to be automatically started when the OS is started. As a general rule, youdo not have to make any settings in the "Startup" tab, because these settings aremade automatically in the PCS 7 environment. To limit the load on the computer tothe amount required, you should activate only those applications that are actuallyrequired for process operation. For example, if you use Tag Logging duringprocess control, you must activate this application. Likewise, the "GraphicsRuntime" application can be deactivated for an OS server that does not have theoperator control and monitoring function.

For detailed information, refer to WinCC Help.

Language Setting and Shortcut Keys – "Parameters" Tab

Use the "Parameters" tab to block certain commonly used Windows shortcut keysto prevent operators from starting additional software applications during processoperation that could adversely affect performance of the PCS 7 OS. Differentsettings are made in this tab for the configuration phase than for actual use:

If … … Then

You are still in theconfiguration phase

Do not make any settings in this tab

The project is in actual use Block all Windows shortcut keys that the plantoperator must not use.

Do not make this setting unless the configurationis complete.

For detailed information, refer to WinCC Help.

Settings for Windows and Keys in the Process – "Graphics Runtime" Tab

Use the "Graphics Runtime" tab to specify all applicable settings for the displayduring process operation. As a general rule, you do not have to make any settingsin this tab.

Additional settings for the display can be made in the OS Project Editor.

For example, you can activate the "Maximize" and "Minimize" window attributes,provided you are in test mode. This allows you to quickly change from the runtimedisplay to other applications in test mode.

Notice

Always deactivate these settings when the project goes into actual use.

Page 75: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 4-5

Settings for Process Operation – "Runtime" Tab

You specify settings for process operation in the "Runtime" tab:

• If you use VB scripts: settings for a VBS debugger during process operation

• Definition of a cache for process pictures

• Appearance of cursor for defined plant operator actions

4.3.3.1 How to Work in the Computer Properties Dialog

1. In the navigation window in WinCC Explorer, select the "Computer" object andselect the Edit > Properties menu command.The "Computer List Properties" dialog is displayed. In the PCS 7 environment,the only computer shown is the one you selected in SIMATIC Manager whenyou opened WinCC Explorer.

2. Select the computer and click "Properties."The "Computer Properties" dialog is displayed, and the "General" tab is active.

3. If you want to change the default settings, switch to the appropriate tab andenter your settings.

Note

As a general rule, you do not have to make any changes in the "General" and"Startup" tabs.

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

For detailed information, refer to WinCC Help.

Page 76: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station4-6 A5E00164212-01

4.4 Working with the OS Project Editor

4.4.1 OS Project Editor Overview

Settings for the user interface used by the plant operator for monitoring andcontrolling the plant during process operation are made in the OS Project Editor.The data you created in SIMATIC Manager are automatically entered followingexecution of the "Compile OS" function. Some of the specific settings must bemade here.

Open the Project Editor in WinCC Explorer using the "Editors > Project Editor"menu command.

Introduction to the OS Project Editor

The following tabs are available in the OS Project Editor:

Tab Function

Layout Monitor configuration and specification of buttons to enable theplant operator to switch between individual areas and servers

MessageConfiguration

Settings for message lists and area assignments

Areas Specification of areas that the plant operator can access from theoverview area

RuntimeWindow

Definition of the maximum number of windows that can be openedwhen faceplates and curves are called

Basic Data Selection of objects that are to be replaced after a change. Thefollowing objects can be selected:

• Pictures

• Faceplates

• Scripts

General • Settings for the OS Project Editor for the "Download Changes"function. Note that a complete download operation is requiredwith the "Complete configuration" setting.

• Settings for protocols that are replaced when the project editoris executed.

Additional information on the setting options can be found in WinCC Help.

Page 77: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 4-7

Working with the OS Project Editor

Each time a change is made in a tab, an asterisk is displayed next to the tab name.In this way, WinCC signals that the tab contains unsaved changes.

When you open the OS Project Editor the first time, the default settings that wereautomatically accepted during ES configuration are shown. An exception to this isthe "Basic Data" tab, where the list entries change automatically according to thepicture and script configuration in your PCS 7 OS configuration.

Additional information on the individual tabs can be found in WinCC Help.

Page 78: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station4-8 A5E00164212-01

Page 79: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 5-1

5 Setting the User Authorizations

5.1 User Authorizations Overview

User authorizations are important in process operation. With user authorization,you can control the functions that plant operator can use during process operation:For example, not all plant operators are authorized to acknowledge messages ormake process control inputs.

AttentionAnother setting must be made in the project editor to ensure that the plantoperator is allowed to acknowledge only those messages that have been enabledfor his area.

For more information, refer to the notes in the section "Settings in the AlarmSystem – Settings in the OS Project Editor – Settings for the Alarm System in theOS Project Editor".

In WinCC Explorer, call the "User Administrator" editor and in this editor, defineand assign the required authorization to the users and user groups.

If the plant operator logs on with his login and password during process operationto monitor and modify the project, his assigned user authorizations are checked,and he is given access only to the project areas and functions that correspond tohis authorizations.

You set user authorizations in the "User Administrator" editor, which you canaccess in WinCC Explorer by means of the following menu command:

"Editors > User Administrator > Open"

You can find information on the "User Administrator" editor and user authorizationin WinCC Help and in the SIMATIC HMI WinCC, Volume 1/2 manual.

Page 80: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Setting the User Authorizations

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station5-2 A5E00164212-01

5.2 User Authorizations and PCS 7

You have already defined the structure of your plant with all of its components inthe plant hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager: plants, plant sections, continuousfunction charts (CFC), pictures, etc. The plant hierarchy is the basis for defining theareas you use to specify user authorization, that is, certain users or user groupsonly have access to particular areas.

Picture Tree Manager

There is a commonality between areas displayed in the "User Administrator" editorand the "Picture Tree Manager" editor, in that the containers in the secondhierarchy level of the "Picture Tree Manager" are displayed as areas in the "UserAdministrator" for which you can assign user authorization.

If you insert and save a new container in the second hierarchy level of the "PictureTree Manager," this container is displayed as a new area in the "UserAdministrator."

Notice

Avoid making subsequent modifications in the "Picture Tree Manager." The moresubsequent changes you make, the larger the differences will be between theproject data in the SIMATIC Manager and the project data in WinCC Explorer.Moreover, manual modifications of the plant structure can be overwritten or maynot be updated if the OS is recompiled.

Page 81: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Setting the User Authorizations

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 5-3

5.3 Setting User Authorizations

Certain functions in WinCC require a particular user authorization to makeconfiguration settings or to monitor/make modifications during process operation.

You have the following options:

• Create user groups – up to 128 user groups

• Create individual users – up to 128 users

The different areas of the plant structure from the SIMATIC Manager are displayedin the "User Administrator" dialog. There can be up to 256 areas. The settings aredefined as follows:

Color Meaning

White No authorization

Red Authorization for the associated area

Brown Authorization granted automatically by setting the higher-levelauthorization "Enable."

The "Enable" column is a higher-level setting for all areas: When you double-click afunction in this column, all other areas are automatically activated.

User Group

You can create various user groups and assign certain types of user authorizationto them. A group name can only be assigned once. Individual users can be createdwithin a user group. Authorization 1, "User Administration," is the default setting forusers in the "Administrator" group. This class cannot be deleted.

When assigning user authorizations, you should first determine the basic types ofuser authorization you require for your project. Then, for these different types ofuser authorization, you will create user groups with the appropriate userauthorization. The next step is where you will create individual users.

Users

You can define exact user authorization for each individual user. For a betteroverview, you should allocate each individual user to a user group. When youcreate a user in a user group, you can simply accept the settings for that usergroup, so that all you have to do is configure any special settings required for theuser.

For each user, create a login and password.

Page 82: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Setting the User Authorizations

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station5-4 A5E00164212-01

5.4 Using a Chip Card

The chip card for user authorization expands the functionality of the UserAdministrator.

How a Chip Card Works during Process Operation

During process operation, the plant operator inserts the chip card into the readdevice, which automatically logs him into the system with the user authorizationthat is stored on the chip card.

With a login name and corresponding password, the functionality of the chip cardreader can be used together with the login function in an operator station.

Creating a Chip Card

If you want to use a chip card to log in the plant operator during process operation,you must perform the following steps:

Step Action

A The chip card function is activated in the Windows Control Panel:

Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > WinCC Chipcard Terminal.

This activates the menu command in the WinCC "User Administrator"editor.

B The actual chip card is created in the WinCC "User Administrator" editor:

Select the Chip Card > Write to Chip Card menu command, select therequired user from the drop-down list box, and start the write process.

You will find detailed information on the "Chip Card" function in WinCC Help.

Page 83: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Setting the User Authorizations

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 5-5

5.5 User Authorizations in the Different Editors

You can set special authorization in the following WinCC editors:

• Tag Logging

• Graphics Designer for user objects and controls, such as WinCC AlarmControl, WinCC Online Trend Control, etc.

Requirement

You have already created the required user groups and users in the "UserAdministrator" editor.

Tag Logging

In the "Tag Logging" editor, you create and define specific properties for variousarchives. In the "Properties [Name of Archive]" dialog, you can set authorization forread and write access to this archive.

You can find information on this topic under "Archiving Options > Archiving in TagLogging Overview ".

Graphics Designer

• User objects – the "Authorization" attribute is defined in the object properties.

• Alarm Control – during process operation, a control displays a toolbarcontaining various buttons that can be used by the plant operator to carry outvarious functions. You can define user authorization for each button in theobject properties.

• Online Trend Control – with Online Trend Control, the plant operator hasseveral operating options. You can define the authorization in the objectproperties.

• Etc.

Page 84: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Setting the User Authorizations

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station5-6 A5E00164212-01

5.5.1 How to Make Settings for User Authorizations

The basic procedure for setting user authorizations is presented below. For moredetailed information, refer to WinCC Help.

Requirement

You have executed the "Compile OS" function such that all plants and plantsections that you created in the plant hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager areavailable.

Proceed as follows …

1. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editors > User Administration > Open menucommand.The "User Administrator" dialog opens.

2. Check whether all plants/plant sections from the plant hierarchy are availablefor setting user authorization.

3. Create user groups.For more information, refer to WinCC Help.

4. In the navigation window, select the required user group.

5. Double-click the round field of the area and function for which you want toassign a user authorization.The field will be highlighted in red.

6. Make the required settings for the automatic logout and for "Login only withchip card."

7. Create users within a user group.

- Define the login and password.

- Select the "Also Copy Group Settings" option.

8. If necessary, define the settings that are to apply only for this user.

9. Close the "User Administrator" editor.

You can find information about additional settings in the "User Administrator" editorin WinCC Help.

Page 85: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-1

6 Creating Process Pictures – Basics

6.1 Process Pictures in the PCS 7 OS

You can display the entire plant or a plant section using process pictures to enableplant operators to control and monitor the process.

Plant operators can see the exact status of the plant using the process pictures, forexample, whether a valve is open or closed, or the fill level in a tank. In addition,the plant operator has the option of controlling the process directly using theprocess pictures.

Requirements

In order to start configuring the process pictures, the following preparations mustbe made in the plant hierarchy:

• The pictures must be inserted in the plant hierarchy.

• The AS-OS assignment must be made.

• Block icons, if required, must have been created.

• The OS must be compiled.

Notice

Always create the process pictures first in the plant hierarchy inSIMATIC Manager, rather than directly in the Graphics Designer. This approach isnecessary to avoid inconsistencies between the configuration data for the ES andPCS 7 OS.

Only those pictures that are required, for example, for configuration of statusdisplays, can be managed exclusively in the Graphics Designer, since they are notdirectly associated with the plant hierarchy.

Page 86: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-2 A5E00164212-01

6.2 Graphics Designer Overview

The Graphics Designer is an editor in WinCC Explorer. The Graphics Designerprovides various objects for creating your own graphics. Moreover, the librarysupplied with the Graphics Designer offers a large selection of ready-madegraphical elements such as piping and valves. You can modify or supplementthese elements and place them in your own project libraries for use at any time.

Pictures created in the Graphics Designer are placed in the following directory bydefault:

[STEP7]\[ S7proj]\[Name of Project Folder]\[wincproj]\[Name of OS]\GraCS

The Graphics Designer is described in SIMATIC HMI WinCC Volume 2/2 manualand in the WinCC Help.

6.3 Graphics Designer Options

6.3.1 Different Objects in the Graphics Designer

The Graphics Designer contains various types of objects. The fundamentaldifferentiation is between static and dynamic objects. The standard WinCC libraryoffers a large number of ready-made objects for use when creating processpictures.

• Static objects – These objects are purely character objects such as lines,circles, polygons, and static text. If you have worked with a character programin the past, you will be familiar with working with these objects.For additional information, refer to WinCC Help.

• Dynamic objects – These objects are made dynamic--that is, they displaycurrent process values at all times during runtime--by linking them to a tag orby using certain functions. Examples of dynamic standard objects areinput/output fields and status displays.

Page 87: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-3

6.3.2 Types of Dynamic Updating

There are several options for dynamic updating of objects inserted in a processpicture:

• Tag connection – This is the simplest dynamic updating method. An object islinked to an input/output, such as a block instance in a continuous functionchart (CFC). The current value of this input/output is displayed at all timesduring process operation.

• Dynamic dialog – Dynamic updating is formulated using tags, functions, andarithmetic operations in an expression. You have the option of defining specificvalue ranges.For additional information, refer to the topic, "Dynamic Updating of an Action"in WinCC Help.

• Direct link – A link is established between objects, whereby parameters areassigned only to the so-called source object, which links to the target object.Additional information on the function and on configuration of direct links canbe found in WinCC Help.

• C actions – A C action results when an event (for example, a change to abinary tag) is logically combined with a function programmed in ANSI- C. Thisfunction is activated by an event or cyclically. Normally, a C action is directlycombined with the object property that is to be influenced by the action. Forexample, you could use a C action to define the color of an analog value inrelation to a tag.

Notice

If you use numerous or extensive actions, you must expect a higher system load,which can cause adverse effects, including longer picture access times duringruntime.

Move cyclic computing operations to the AS and avoid executing them on the OS.

Page 88: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-4 A5E00164212-01

6.3.3 Tag Connection and Tag Selection Dialog

The tag selection dialog is used to link an object to a tag in the Graphics Designer.Using this dialog, you can easily make objects dynamic from the GraphicsDesigner. Tags displayed in this dialog can originate from sequential functioncharts (SFC), SFC instances, and block instances in continuous function charts(CFC).

If you would like the tags to be visible at all times, activate the "Tags" toolbar.

Mode of Operation

The tag selection dialog can be used to link objects inserted in a process picture inthe Graphics Designer, such as input/output fields and faceplates, to thecorresponding input/output of a block instance in the continuous function chart(CFC). During process operation, these objects can read out the current value ofthe input/output from the AS and display it on the OS.

The component view and the plant view from SIMATIC Manager are also found inthe tag selection dialog. Tags from other projects that are part of the multiprojectcan also be accessed in the tag selection dialog.

Page 89: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-5

Tag Sources

During configuration, you can choose between three tag sources:

• ES variables – With ES variables, all process tags can be displayed fromPCS 7. For example, process tags can come from sequential function charts(SFC) and continuous function charts (CFC) created during ES configuration.ES variables are displayed exactly the same as in the plant hierarchy inSIMATIC Manager. As soon as an object is linked to an ES tag, this tag isautomatically entered in the WinCC tag management, if it is not alreadypresent.

• WinCC tags – With WinCC tags, all tags relevant to the PCS 7 OSconfiguration can be displayed. To facilitate locating a particular tag, the filterfunction should always be used.In addition, tags created directly in WinCC are displayed. As a general rule, thisfunction is not used in the PCS 7 environment, since the tag management isadministered centrally via the ES configuration.The WinCC tag name is structured as follows:

Plant1/ RMT1/ FC111/ Dose ER Floating-pointnumber

DB 73 DD 96

PHLevel 1

PHLevel 2

CFC chart Block Element Data type Instance DB Address

Filter in Tag Selection Dialog

The "Filter:" field can be used to specify a search condition for the tag name. Whenyou exit the field using the tab key, only those tags that match the search criterionare displayed.

WinCC Help contains additional information on the tag selection dialog.

Page 90: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-6 A5E00164212-01

6.3.4 Configuring and Storing Tags in WinCC

Tags can also be seen directly using WinCC Explorer by selecting "TagManagement" in the navigation window. All channels, logical connections, processand internal tags, and tag groups of WinCC are managed there. Tags fromSIMATIC Manager are stored in the WinCC tag management.

Tags are displayed in accordance with the settings made when the "Compile OS"function was executed, that is, the individual S7 programs are displayed for theassociated links. If you select an S7 program in the navigation structure, all tagsare displayed in the detail window.

Tag management

Internal tags

Structure types

Simatic S7 Protocol Suite

Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet ll

MPI

Named Connections

Profibus

Slot PLC

TCP/IP

CTRL_PID

Meas_Mon

Motor

The existing connections to therespective tags of eachinterface is displayed.

Block type (sorted):The transferred block instance is displayed forevery block. Only blocks withcontrolling andmonitoring properties are transferred from the AS.

Profibus II

Page 91: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-7

6.3.5 Dynamic PCS 7 Standard Objects

A number of ready-made dynamic objects are available in the Graphics Designerfor use when process pictures are created. The standard objects can be found inthe Object Palette of the Graphics Designer under "Smart Objects."

The primary objects are introduced briefly below:

Object Function

Input/output fields Input/output fields function as follows:

• Current process values are displayed

• Values can be entered directly by the plant operatorduring runtime

This field can be used as an input field only, an output fieldonly, or as a combined input/output field.

Status display The status display is used to display any number of binaryobject states. For example, a status display can showwhether a valve is open or shut.

Bar A bar can be used to display values in relation to oneanother, for example, how the current value relates to anupper and lower tolerance.

Control A control can be used to show the curve characteristic ofcertain measured values seen by the plant operator duringprocess operation.

Picture window Picture windows form a type of container in a process picturethat can incorporate an additional picture. The incorporatedpicture is a standard picture created for a particular blocktype that can be used multiple times. A specific tagconnection is not made until you insert this picture in thepicture window.

Group display A hierarchy was created corresponding to your plantstructure. Even in a process picture that only displays ageneral overview of an entire plant, the plant operatorrequires information from the measuring points located inpictures from lower-level hierarchy levels. This informationcan be shown using a group display, in which the status,such as an alarm, is displayed in color. The plant operatorcan switch directly to the measuring point from the groupdisplay.

Status display(extended)

Analog display(extended)

The advantage of extended status displays compared tonormal status displays is that a group display can beintegrated as well. As a result, an alarm status and anoperating status can be shown simultaneously. Both binaryand analog values can be shown using the two differenttypes of status displays.

For detailed information on the individual objects, refer to "Smart Objects" inWinCC Help.

Page 92: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-8 A5E00164212-01

6.3.6 Dynamic User-Created Objects

In addition to standard objects, you have the option to create objects yourself. Youcan combine a large number of individual steps into a few steps when you createobjects. The primary objects that can be created by the user are:

• Faceplate – A faceplate is a dynamic object that displays a certain block type.By linking to a structure tag, all tags contained in a faceplate are automaticallylinked to the associated block parameters and made dynamic.

• Block icons – A plant operator can use a block icon to access a faceplate. Ablock icon is implemented as a user object. A block icon can consist of differentdynamic objects so that the most important information is available in theoverview. An additional script allows the plant operator to access theassociated faceplate with one mouse click.

• User object – A user object results from combining individual objects. Theadvantage of a user object is that only those properties actually needed forlinking to tags can be selected from the numerous properties included witheach object.

• User object templates – User object templates can be created starting from auser object. The main advantage of user object templates is the option to makemaster changes and update all instances in one step.

6.3.7 Configuration Steps for Dynamic Objects Overview

An overview of the basic mode of operation with dynamic objects is given below.

You must perform the steps in the exact order given:

Step Action

1 Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer

2 Insert the dynamic object

3 Configure the dynamic object

4 Specify the object properties

Additional information on dynamic objects can be found in WinCC Help.

Page 93: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-9

6.3.7.1 Step 1 – How to Open a Picture in the Graphics Designer

You can open a picture from SIMATIC Manager or WinCC Explorer.

If … … Then

You are in SIMATICManager…

1. Select the plant view.

2. In the detail view, select the picture you want to editin the Graphics Designer.

3. Select the Edit > Open Object menu command.WinCC Explorer is displayed followed by theselected picture in the Graphics Designer.

You are in WinCCExplorer…

1. Select the "Graphics Designer" object in thenavigation window.All of the existing picture objects are then displayedin the detail window.

2. Double-click the required picture in the list.This opens the picture in the Graphics Designer.

6.3.7.2 Step 2 – How to Insert a Dynamic Object

1. Open a picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Object Palette" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbars menucommand, and select the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette is displayed, and the "Standard" tab is active.

3. In the Object Palette, select the required object under "Smart Objects."

4. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The cursor changes according to the object selected.

5. Holding the mouse button down, drag a rectangle corresponding to the size ofyour object.

Page 94: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-10 A5E00164212-01

6.3.7.3 Step 3 – How to Configure a Dynamic Object

As soon as a dynamic object is inserted, the configuration dialog is displayed. Ofcourse, you always have the option to reopen the configuration dialog and makechanges to the settings.

The Configuration Dialog is Automatically Displayed

If you have positioned the object on the workspace, WinCC automatically opens adialog where additional settings can be made.

Depending on the type of dynamic object, an appropriate dialog is displayed wherethe configuration can be made:

If … … Then

You inserted anapplication window

The "Window Contents" dialog is displayed.

Select what is to be displayed in the applicationwindow.

Picture window No additional dialog is opened.

Control The "Insert Control" dialog is displayed.

Select the required control from the list.

You inserted an OLEobject

The "Insert Object" dialog of Windows is displayed.

You have two options:

• Select the application you want to use to createthe OLE object.

• Select an existing file.

You inserted anInput/output field

The "Configuration" dialog is displayed.

Click the button next to the "Tag" text box, and select atag from the tag selection dialog. In addition, specifythe update cycle, the field type, and formattingparameters.

You inserted a bar The "Configuration" dialog is displayed.

Click the button next to the "Tag" text box, and select atag from the tag selection dialog. In addition, specifythe update cycle, limits, and formatting parameters.

You inserted a graphicobject

The "Graphic Object Configuration" dialog is displayed.

Select the picture that you want to display as a graphicobject.

Status display The "Status Display Configuration" dialog is displayed.

Click the button next to the "Tag" text box, and select atag from the tag selection dialog. Select a picture, andspecify the update cycle.

For more information, refer to the Getting Startedmanual Process Control System PCS 7; Part 1 – First-Time User.

Page 95: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-11

If … … Then

You inserted a text list The "Configuration" dialog is displayed.

Click the button next to the "Tag" text box, and select atag from the tag selection dialog. Specify the updatecycle, field type, and formatting parameters.

You inserted a 3D bar No additional dialog is opened.

The following values must be set separately in the"Properties" dialog:

• Maximum value

• Minimum value

• Process input/output

Group display For information on inserting and configuring a groupdisplay, refer to "Creating Process Pictures – Basics >Group Display Overview".

Status display (extended) For information on inserting and configuring anextended status display, refer to "Extended StatusDisplay Overview".

Click "OK" to save your inputs.This inserts the dynamic object with the corresponding settings.

Reopening the Configuration Dialog

If you want to change the configuration settings later, you must reopen theconfiguration dialog. Proceed as follows:

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. Open the shortcut menu for the object that you want to configure, and selectthe Configuration Dialog … command.The configuration dialog is displayed.

3. Enter the settings.

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 96: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-12 A5E00164212-01

6.3.7.4 Step 4 – How to Specify the Object Properties

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer, and select the object onthe workspace.

2. Select the View > Properties menu command.The "Properties" dialog is displayed.

3. Select the tab corresponding to the required settings:

If … … Then

You want to make settings for the object'sappearance and layout

Select the "Properties" tab

You want an object to be modified when acertain event occurs, such as a mouse click.

Select the "Event" tab

4. Close the dialog.This stores your inputs.

6.4 How to Use Standard Objects in PCS 7

6.4.1 Principal PCS 7 Standard Objects Overview

Some of the frequently-used standard objects provided by PCS 7 are:

• Status display

• Input/output field

• Group display

6.4.2 Working with a Status Display

The status display is used to display the status of an object. "0" and "1" are thesimplest binary states. For example, "0" can correspond to the "valve closed" stateand "1" to the "valve open" state. However, the status display can indicate not onlytwo states but practically any number of different states. The status display is madedynamic by linking to a tag with the value of the respective state. You can assign

any number from 122 32 −bis (bit combinations) to the tag.

Page 97: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-13

6.4.2.1 How to Configure a Status Display

A status display is configured in the Graphics Designer. You have the option tologically combine a status display with PCS 7 standard pictures or user-definedpictures:

Status Display with Standard Pictures

The configuration steps are summarized below.

Step Action

1 Drag the "Status Display" object from the Object Palette to theworkspace.

2 Establish the connection to the associated tag in the "Configuration"dialog.

3 Move the standard pictures to the various states using a drag and dropoperation.

Status Display with User-Defined Pictures

The configuration steps are summarized below.

Step Action

1 Create pictures to display each state and export them as an *.emf file.

2 Drag the "Status Display" object from the Object Palette to theworkspace.

3 Establish the link to the associated tag in the "Configuration" dialog, andlink the states to the associated pictures.

Page 98: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-14 A5E00164212-01

6.4.3 Extended Status Display Overview

The extended status display has a major advantage over the simple status displayin that it shows an alarm status and an operating status simultaneously so that theplant operator can see fast alarms, warnings, and errors in addition to the operatingstatus.

There are two basic types of extended status display:

• Status display (extended) – This display shows binary states of a blockinterface with the associated alarm states.

• Analog display (extended) – This display shows an analog value in variouscolors. The colors correspond to each alarm state.

You must first set the parameters for the extended status displays in aconfiguration dialog. The tag connection to the associated block instance is thenestablished.

Import/Export Function

After the status display is configured, you can export the settings in a *.xml file and,if necessary, you can reimport the settings to another status display. This functionsaves you work if you want to use a status display to represent the same block indifferent ways, for example, showing a valve in horizontal and vertical orientation.

The steps are presented below using the horizontal/vertical valve representation asan example:

Step Action

1 Configure the status display for the horizontal valve representation:

• Define all operating and alarm states

• Assign associated bitmaps

2 Export this configuration in an *.xml file.

3 Execute the "Search/Replace" function to replace all instances of thename of the bitmap showing the valve in horizontal orientation with thename of the bit map showing the valve in vertical orientation.

4 Save the *.xml file under a self-explanatory name.

5 Import the settings from the modified *.xml file for the vertical valverepresentation.

Page 99: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-15

6.4.4 Working with the Status Display (Extended)

A maximum of four different binary signals representing 16 different operatingstates can be shown in the status display (extended). The four signals are bit-coded in the 32-bit tag of block type VSTATUS. The operating states can belogically combined with alarm states, if desired. You must define different prioritiesfor these alarm states and/or deactivate certain alarm states that the block isunable to assume. The alarm priority defines which alarm is displayed first ifseveral alarms are pending simultaneously. The following rule applies duringprocess operation: an unacknowledged alarm always has a higher priority than anacknowledged alarm.

All of the settings are made in a configuration dialog. Different combinations resultaccording to the selected binary states and alarm states. The bitmap that you wantto have displayed in the process picture can then be assigned to each individualcombination.

Information in the Online Help System for the Block Type

The online Help system for the corresponding block type contains the followinginformation needed for configuring the status display (extended):

• Assignment of an operating state to a particular bit in the "VSTATUS" tag. Allbinary states that can be shown in the status display (extended) are stored inthe "VSTATUS" tag.

• Alarm states that this block type can normally assume

Overview of Steps

Steps for inserting and configuring the status display (extended) are summarizedbelow:

Step Content

1 Determine inputs/outputs in VSTATUS

2 Make preparations

3 Insert status display (extended)

4 Configure status display (extended)

5 Establish tag connection

Page 100: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-16 A5E00164212-01

6.4.4.1 How to Determine the Bit Number from VSTATUS

When configuring the extended status display, you need the bit number of theblock interface you want to display. The bit number is stored in the VSTATUS tag.Information can be found in the online Help for the block:

1. In SIMATIC Manager, open a continuous function chart (CFC) and select theblock for which you want to insert an extended status display.

2. Press the "F1" key.The online Help system for the block is displayed.

3. Refer to the section on "Assignment of 32-bit VSTATUS" for the "Bit Number" –"Parameter" assignment.As a general rule, this information can be found in "Description of [Name ofBlock]."

6.4.4.2 How to Prepare the Extended Status Display

The preparation is illustrated using the "Valve" block as an example:

Selecting the Inputs/Outputs from the VStatus Tag

To begin with, you specify the inputs/outputs that are to be shown in the statusdisplay. In this example, the following inputs/outputs are specified:

• QOPEN

• QCLOSE

• QOPENING

• QCLOSING

Creating a Status Table

Then, you create a table where you enter all possible states from which therelevant index is identified and the picture assignment is made. The table for thevalve has the following appearance:

Bit 0

QOPEN

2 high 0=1

Bit 1

QCLOSE

2 high 1=2

Bit 2

QOPENING

2 high 2=4

Bit 3

QCLOSING

2 high 3=8

Index

Basic Picture

Flash Picture

0 0 0 0 0 Undefined –

1 0 0 0 1 @VVE_opened –

0 1 0 0 2 @VVE_closed –

1 1 0 0 3 @VVE_error –

0 0 1 0 4 @VVE_closed @VVE_opened

1 0 1 0 5 @VVE_error –

0 1 1 0 6 @VVE_error –

1 1 1 0 7 @VVE_error –

Page 101: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-17

Bit 0

QOPEN

2 high 0=1

Bit 1

QCLOSE

2 high 1=2

Bit 2

QOPENING

2 high 2=4

Bit 3

QCLOSING

2 high 3=8

Index

Basic Picture

Flash Picture

0 0 0 1 8 @VVE_opened @VVE_closed

1 0 0 1 9 @VVE_error –

0 1 0 1 10 @VVE_error –

1 1 0 1 11 @VVE_error –

0 0 1 1 12 @VVE_error –

1 0 1 1 13 @VVE_error –

0 1 1 1 14 @VVE_error –

1 1 1 1 15 @VVE_error –

This table is then used to configure the extended status display in the associateddialog.

6.4.4.3 How to Insert an Extended Status Display

1. Open a process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Object Palette" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbars menucommand, and select the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette is displayed, and the "Standard" tab is active.

3. In the Object Palette, select the "Status Display (Extended)" object under"Smart Objects."

4. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The cursor changes to a small status display symbol.

5. Holding the mouse button down, drag a rectangle corresponding to the size ofyour extended status display.The "Properties of Extended Status Display" dialog is displayed.

Page 102: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-18 A5E00164212-01

6.4.4.4 How to Configure an Extended Status Display

1. Open the configuration dialog:

If … … Then

The status display (extended) wasjust inserted

The configuration dialog is alreadydisplayed.

You want to change the configurationlater

Open the shortcut menu, and select theConfiguration Dialog command.

2. The "Properties of Extended Status Display" dialog is displayed, and the"General" tab is active.

3. In the "Bit Selection" area, select the check boxes for the status words youwant to display.In addition, specify how many states are to be displayed.

4. In the associated text box, enter the number of bits to be displayed in thestatus display.In addition, specify the specific block interface for which a status is to bedisplayed.

5. Specify the priorities of the alarm states in the "Priorities" area.

Note

A "0" entry means that the alarm state will not be displayed.

6. Switch to the "Bitmap Assignment" tab.

7. The list includes all of the basic combination options corresponding to yoursettings in the "General" tab.

8. Select the listed combination that you want to display during process operation.

9. Select the required picture from the list of pictures and double-click it.This assigns the picture to the combination and displays the picture in the"Basic Picture" column.

10. If you want to define a flash picture as well, select the required flash picture inthe list and double-click it.This assigns the picture to the combination as a flash picture and displays thepicture in the "flash picture."

11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 for all combinations for which pictures are to be specified.

12. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 103: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-19

6.4.4.5 How to Make the Tag Connection

1. Open the shortcut menu for the extended status display, and select theProperties command.The "Object Properties" dialog is displayed, and the "Properties" tab is active.

2. Make the following settings:

Property Attributes Action

Miscellaneous Group value Link tag to the "Event State" tag of therequired block instance.

Status Link tag to the "VSTATUS" tag of therequired block instance.

Note

For the "EventState" tag, you must select "WinCC Tags" as the data source in thetag selection dialog.

3. Close the dialog.

6.4.5 Working with the Analog Display (Extended)

The analog display (extended) shows the value of an analog block interface. Thevalue is shown in color according to the current alarm status of this interface.

Overview of Steps

Steps for inserting and configuring the analog display (extended) are summarizedbelow:

Step Content

1 Insert analog display (extended)

2 Configure analog display (extended)

3 Establish tag connection

Page 104: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-20 A5E00164212-01

6.4.5.1 How to Insert an Extended Analog Display

1. Open a process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Object Palette" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbars menucommand, and select the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette is displayed, and the "Standard" tab is active.

3. In the Object Palette, select the "Analog Display (Extended)" object under"Smart Objects."

4. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The cursor changes to a small status display symbol.

5. Holding the mouse button down, drag a rectangle corresponding to the size ofyour extended analog display.The configuration dialog ha_proj_cc_gdes_expanalog_conf is displayed.

6.4.5.2 How to Configure an Extended Analog Display

1. Open the configuration dialog:

If … … Then

The analog display (extended) wasjust inserted

The configuration dialog is alreadydisplayed.

You want to change the configurationlater

Open the shortcut menu, and select theConfiguration Dialog... command.

2. The "Properties of Extended Analog Display" dialog is displayed, and the"Analog Display Properties" tab is active.

3. Specify the priorities of the alarm states in the "Priorities" area.

Note

A "0" entry means that the alarm state will not be displayed.

4. Assign colors to the various alarm states, according to your preference.

5. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

Page 105: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-21

6.4.5.3 How to Make the Tag Connection for the Analog Display

1. Open the shortcut menu for the extended status display, and select theProperties command.The "Object Properties" dialog is displayed, and the "Properties" tab is active.

2. Make the following settings:

Property Attributes Action

Miscellaneous Group value Link tag to the "Event State" tag of the requiredblock instance.

Value Link tag to the tag that represents thecorresponding analog value

3. Close the dialog.

6.4.6 Working with Input/Output Fields

Input/output fields can be used to input or output values. The "Input/Output Field"object can be defined in any the following ways:

• As an output field only

• As an input field only

• As a combined input and output field

Input/output fields can handle different data formats, such as binary, decimal,string, and hexadecimal.

6.4.6.1 How to Configure an Input/Output Field

The input/output field is configured in the Graphics Designer. The configurationsteps are summarized below. For detailed information on the configuration steps,refer to the Getting Started manual, Process Control System PCS 7; Part 1 – First-Time User.

Step Action

1 Drag the "Input/Output Field" object from the Object Palette to theworkspace.

2 In the "Configuration" dialog, make the connection to the associated tagand specify the field type.

3 Optional: Add static text for additional description of the input/outputfield.

Page 106: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-22 A5E00164212-01

6.4.7 Group Display Overview

A group display informs the plant operator about the message status of ameasuring point during process operation. This allows the plant operator to quicklydetect alarms, warnings, or errors. The group display is a standard object providedby WinCC and can be inserted in a process picture. A group display is configuredusing wizards in WinCC. Additional properties for this object can be set in the sameway as for other dynamic objects, that is, settings are made in the "Properties" and"Event" tabs.

Group Display during Process Operation – in Process Pictures

The message status of a measuring point can be seen directly in a process pictureusing the group display. From each group display, the plant operator can switch toother process pictures or picture blocks.

Group Display during Process Operation – Overview Area

If a group display has been inserted in a process picture and the plant hierarchyhas been saved in the Picture Tree Manager with the "Calculate the group displayhierarchy completely new again while saving" or "Delta Save" option, theassociated group display is automatically displayed in the overview area duringprocess operation. It is located next to the button for each process picture so thatthat plant operator can quickly switch to the corresponding process picture in caseof an alarm or a warning.

Options for Making a Group Display Dynamic

The following options are available for making a group display dynamic:

• Connecting the group display to a PCS 7 tag structureThis connects the group display to a tag structure so that the status of a PCS 7tag structure, such as the status of a motor block, can be displayed to the plantoperator during runtime.

• Selecting a Picture via a Measuring PointThis links the group display to a faceplate so that the plant operator can switchdirectly to the faceplate of the measuring point. This function can be used bothto make a group display dynamic and to make other picture objects dynamic.

• Connecting the Group Display to a Picture and Selecting a Picture via a GroupDisplayTo begin with, this connects the group display to a picture so that messagesfrom lower-level pictures or subpictures of a plant structure can be transferredto a picture in a higher-level hierarchy level and displayed there during processoperation. Then, an event is defined for use by the plant operator to switchdirectly via a group display to the picture where the alarm occurred.

Page 107: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-23

6.4.8 Displaying a Group Display during Process Operation

Message types are displayed by the "Group Display" object in four display areasarranged side-by-side. Viewing is supported by showing the display areas indifferent colors, flash mode, and text display. The default colors and flash modes inthe object correspond to those commonly used in process engineering. Thefollowing different message types are specified by default:

• First display area – redAlarm High, Alarm Low

• Second display area can show two message types. If a warning and atolerance message exist at the same time, the warning message has higherpriority and is displayed.

- Yellow for Warning High, Warning Low,

- Light blue for Tolerance High, Tolerance Low

• Third display area – blackAS control fault, AS control error, OS control fault

• Fourth display area – dark blueRequest for operator input

For additional information on the group display, refer to WinCC Help.

6.4.8.1 How to Insert a Group Display

1. Open a process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Object Palette" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbars menucommand, and select the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette is displayed, and the "Standard" tab is active.

3. In the Object Palette, select the "Group Display" object under "Smart Objects."

4. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The cursor changes to a small group display symbol.

5. Holding the mouse button down, drag a rectangle corresponding to the size ofyour group display.

Page 108: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-24 A5E00164212-01

6. Establish the link using a wizard:

If … … Then

You want to connect the group display toa block

Start the wizard: "Connect GroupDisplay to PCS 7 Tag Structure"

Information on this wizard can be foundin "Creating Process Pictures – Basics >Standard Objects in PCS 7 > ConnectGroup Display to PCS 7 Tag Structure".

You want to connect a group display to apicture

Start the wizard: "Connect a GroupDisplay to a Picture"

Information on this wizard can be foundin "Creating Process Pictures – Basics >Standard Objects in PCS 7 > Connectingthe Group Display to a Picture".

7. Select the group display, and select the View > Properties menu command.The "Properties" dialog is displayed.

8. Specify the parameters for the group display.

For additional information, refer to WinCC Help.

Page 109: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-25

6.4.9 Connect Group Display to PCS 7 Tag Structure

If you connect a group display to a block using a direct connection, the plantoperator can closely monitor the block during runtime. This group display can beinserted in any process picture. The block must have the system attributes"S7_m_c" and "S7_tag," and these attributes must be set to the value "true."

Overview

Keyset

Group display

A W S O

Process picture

SIMATICStations

Source is e.g. the block

CTRL_PID

Use the "Connect Group Display to PCS 7 Tag Structure" dynamic wizard toestablish the connection.

Page 110: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-26 A5E00164212-01

6.4.9.1 How to Connect a Group Display to a Measuring Input

Requirement

You have inserted the "Group Display" object in the process picture and specifiedthe static properties, such as font and geometry.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbarsmenu command, and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars"field.

3. In the process picture, select the required group display.

4. In the toolbar, switch to the "Standard Dynamics" tab.

5. Double-click the "Connect Group Display to PCS 7 Tag Structure" entry.The wizard is displayed.

6. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Set Options" step is displayed.

7. In the "Set Options" step, click the "Browse" button next to the text box.This opens the tag selection dialog.

8. Select the required block in the "List of All Tags" and click "OK."The required block is entered, and the tag selection dialog is closed.

Note

If your project has a large number of tags, you should use the filter function.Information on the filter function can be found in WinCC Help.

9. Click "Next."The "Finished!" step is displayed.

10. Check your settings and – if no corrections are necessary – click "Finish."This connects the group display to the block.

Page 111: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-27

6.4.10 Connecting the Group Display to a Picture

If a group display is connected to a process picture, information from ahierarchically lower-level process picture can be displayed in a higher-level processpicture. In so doing, all group displays of the lower-level process picture are linkedinternally using an OR operation.

As soon as a message appears on any group display in the lower-level processpicture, the message is "forwarded" so that the information is also available to theplant operator in the higher-level process picture.

The plant operator can then click the group display in the higher-level processpicture to go directly to the lower-level process picture. The option to navigatequickly to the source of a malfunction is essential for the operator and provides forstraightforward and simple process checks.

Overview

Keyset

Range 2Range1

A W S OA W S O

A W S O

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

A W S O

A W S O

A W S O

Overview

Keyset

Picture Hierarchy

Process control in the PCS 7 OS requires a picture hierarchy that guides the plantoperator to pictures where danger states such as alarms are displayed. The picturehierarchy is derived from the plant hierarchy and is shown in the Picture TreeManager in WinCC Explorer. The group display can only receive and forwardmessages when these pictures are arranged appropriately in the hierarchy.

Page 112: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-28 A5E00164212-01

Connecting to the Picture

The "Connect Group Display to Picture" dynamic wizard is used to establish aconnection to the picture. In addition, you must define the event that the operatoruses to switch pictures, for example, a mouse click. To do so, use the "PictureSelection via Measuring Point" dynamic wizard.

6.4.10.1 How to Connect a Group Display to a Picture

Requirement

You have inserted the "Group Display" object in the process picture and specifiedthe static properties, such as font and geometry.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbarsmenu command, and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars"field.

3. In the process picture, select the required group display.

4. In the toolbar, switch to the "Standard Dynamics" tab.

5. Double-click the "Connect Group Display to Picture" entry.The wizard is displayed.

6. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Set Options" step is displayed.

7. In the "Set Options" step, click the "Browse" button next to the text box.The "Picture Browser" dialog is displayed.

8. Select the required picture, and click "OK" to confirm the picture.

9. Click "Next."The "Finished!" step is displayed.

10. Check your settings and – if no corrections are necessary – click "Finish."This connects the group display to the block.

11. Define the event, for example a right mouse click, that is to be used to call thepicture.

Page 113: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 6-29

6.4.10.2 How to Define the Type of Picture Selection

Requirement

The "Group Display" object has already been inserted in the process picture andconnected to a picture.

Proceed as follows …

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar is not visible, select the View > Toolbarsmenu command, and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars"field.

3. In the process picture, select the required group display.

4. In the toolbar, switch to the "Picture Functions" tab.

5. Double-click the "Picture Selection via Group Display" entry.The wizard is displayed.

6. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Select Trigger" step is displayed.

7. Select the operator action in the list that the plant operator can use to open thepicture via the group display, and click "Next.".The "Finished!" step is displayed.

8. Check your settings and – if no corrections are necessary – click "Finish."This connects the group display to the operator action.

Page 114: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Basics

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station6-30 A5E00164212-01

Page 115: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-1

7 Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

7.1 Additional Options for Creating Process PicturesOverview

PCS 7 offers a considerably wider range of options than simple standard objects tocreate process pictures for and customize settings of complex plant structures.This includes the following tools:

• Faceplates – PCS 7 provides ready-made faceplates that display specificvalues of a plant block during process operation.block icon is used to callfaceplates during process operation.

• Alarm messages – you can view messages directly in the process picture via astandard object in the Graphics Designer.

• User objects – a user object is an object in the Graphics Designer that you cancreate from individual standard objects.

• User object templates – user object templates are, in a sense, "improved" userobjects providing the advantage of a central modification option.

• Picture windows – a picture window is a standard object in the GraphicsDesigner that you can insert into the process picture to insert another pictureinto the picture window and connect it to a tag.

• Cross-reference lists – cross-reference lists provide a good overview of all tagsyou have used in your project.

Page 116: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-2 A5E00164212-01

7.2 Function and Use of Faceplates

7.2.1 Using Faceplates

During process operation, faceplates display specific values, such as measuredvalues, operating limits, states of a measuring point, and alarm or error displays ofthe corresponding plant block in the PLC. These values are displayed in a separatewindow.To display these tags, the faceplate automatically retrieves all relevantcurrent information during process operation. In addition, faceplates enableoperator control during process operation and show the plant operator all blockinputs and outputs required to control a process.Faceplates are "normal" *.pdl files.

Connecting to a tag structure type automatically links and makes dynamic all tagscontained in a faceplate to the associated block parameters.

PCS 7 comes with ready-made faceplates for various block types in the PCS 7library, such as CTRL_PID and MEAS_MON.

Calling Faceplates

Faceplates are called during runtime with an event script, for example, a mouseclick.You can use a block icon or any other picture object you wish, such as astatus display or static object.Generally, block icons from PCS 7 are used for thispurpose.Block icons are a symbolic representation of faceplates that provide basicinformation to the plant operator about the status of the associated measuringpoint.The plant operator can then call up detailed information about the measuringpoint by selecting the faceplate of a block icon.

Calling complex faceplates from picture objects ensures brief picture selectiontimes and a clear overview of the entire process picture.

Storing Faceplates

Faceplates are stored for each project in the STEP 7 project directory under"[Name of project directory, for example, wincpro]\[Name_of_OS]\GraCS".

The scripts required for using the faceplates are not stored specifically for eachproject. These scripts are stored in the "Wincc\aplib\FaceplateDesigner" directory.

Page 117: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-3

7.2.2 Relationship between Faceplates and Block Icons

For each plant block, PCS 7 provides you with a corresponding block icon. Thesestandard block icons already contain a call script for the corresponding faceplate,thus eliminating the need to set additional parameters until the block icons arelinked to the physical measuring point. Block icons are executed as user objects.

Using Block Icons

You have two options for using block icons:

• You can create block icons automatically in the SIMATIC Manager using the"Create/Update Block Icons" function – this function automatically inserts blockicons into a process picture according to the plant hierarchy and links them tothe corresponding measuring point. You do not need to make any furtherconfiguration settings. Once the block icons have been created in the processpicture, all you have to do is position them as you wish in the process pictureand – if necessary – insert additional static or dynamic objects. If, for example,you have deleted blocks from continuous function charts (CFCs), theassociated block icons will be deleted the next time this function is executed.

• You can insert additional block icons into a process picture yourself, becausethe arrangement of the measuring points in the plant hierarchy is such thatthey are not detected by an automatic function. To do so, you must use blockicons from the "@templates.pdl" template file and insert them into the processpicture using the "Copy" and "Paste" functions. Finally, use a wizard to connectthe block icons to the process picture.

Background information on then "Create/Update Block Icons…" function can befound under "Configuring PCS 7 OS Data in the SIMATIC Manager – Preparing forOS Configuration – Procedure for Creating Block Icons".

Page 118: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-4 A5E00164212-01

7.2.3 Block Icons and the "@@PCS7Typicals" File

The "@@PCS7Typicals" file contains all block icon templates. When you executethe "Create/Update Block Icons" function, PCS 7 automatically uses block iconsfrom this file. By default, this file is installed when PCS 7 is installed.

Modifying the "@@PCS7Typicals" File

If you wish to modify the standard block icons or create your own block icon, usethe "@@PCS7Typicals" as a starting point. You would do this, for example, tocreate your own block icons to display additional measured values in the icondisplay during process operation or because you want to change the overalldisplay.

Caution

It is essential that you do not make changes in the original file; instead, alwaysmake a copy called "@PCS7Typicals." Changes in the original files areoverwritten when the file is updated.

Different Types of Block Icons

A measuring point can have different types of block icons. The different types ofblock icons can be distinguished in the "type" attribute: the value of this attributeindicates the type. In the case of a block icon type for a valve, for example, thisattribute would have a value of "@Valve/2." The value component that follows the"/" controls what type of block icon is generated. You must therefore enter thiscomponent in the object properties of the block instance. If you do not input anyparameters in the object properties of the block instance, the default block icon isautomatically generated. The default icon is the one that has an identifier of "/1" forthe "type" attribute, for example, "@Valve/1".

Use the following procedure to locate the value of the "type" attribute:

1. Open the "@@PCS7Typicals" or "@PCS7Typicals" file.

2. Select the block icon and select the View > Properties menu command.The "Object Properties" dialog will open with an activated "Properties" tab.

3. In the tree structure, select the "General" property.The corresponding attributes will be displayed.

Page 119: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-5

7.2.4 Block Icons and the "@Template.pdl" File

As a general rule, the "@Template.pdl" file contains the same block icons as the"@@PCS7Typicals" and "@PCS7Typicals" files, with one important difference:The "type" attribute has a different value in each file.

You must use the "@Template.pdl" file when you want to insert additional blockicons manually into a process picture that are not automatically derived from theplant hierarchy. For example, you want to display an additional measuring point ina process picture. This block icon would be deleted if the "Create/Update BlockIcons..." function is reexecuted, because the measuring point is not at the requiredposition in the plant hierarchy. The only way to prevent these block icons frombeing deleted is by using block icons from the "@Template.pdl" file.

Notice

If you have made changes to the block icons in the "@Template.pdl" file, you mustcreate a backup copy before updating the software, because this file will beoverwritten.

7.2.5 Display Types of Faceplates

When you connect any object from the Object Palette of the Graphics Designer,you must specify a suitable display type. The following options provided by thewizard are used to set up the connection:

• Loop display – this display type shows all possible views, such as standard,alarm, and limits, simultaneously from top to bottom.The following two options also exist:

- Loop display > Work area – the display covers the entire work area. It isnot possible to move the faceplate or change its size. The faceplate isdeselected by calling up a new process picture with a button in theoverview area.

- Loop display > Process window – the display appears in a separatewindow that is open along with the process picture. The plant operator canmove this window, change its size, and close it.

• Group display – the display appears in a separate window that the plantoperator can move, change in size, and close. In contrast to the loop display,only one view is active in the group display. The plant operator can changeviews by selecting another view from a drop-down list. The plant operator canswitch from the group display to the loop display in the process window byclicking a button in the group display.

Page 120: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-6 A5E00164212-01

7.2.6 Editing Faceplates – Faceplate Designer

You can edit existing faceplates to customize them for your exact requirements.You can also create entirely new faceplates. Faceplates are *.pdl files that you canmodify or create from scratch in the WinCC Graphics Designer in combination withthe Faceplate Designer.

The Faceplate Designer provides the following support for creating faceplates:

• Template file – PCS 7 elements

• Object modules

• Global scripts

You will find additional information about creating faceplates with the FaceplateDesigner in the WinCC online help and in the Creating Faceplates for PCS 7programming guide, chapter entitled Creating Faceplates with the FaceplateDesigner.

7.2.7 Overview of Working with Block Icons and Faceplates

You have several options when working with faceplates and block icons:

Option 1

In general, you will use this option.

Step Action

1 Insert a block icon

2 Connect a block icon to a measuring point

Option 2

In exceptional cases, you perform the following action:

Connect any object to a faceplate

Page 121: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-7

7.2.7.1 How to Insert a Block Icon

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. Then open the @@PCS7Typicals.pdl picture.This picture provides you with the various block icons of the plant for use astemplates.

3. In this screen, highlight the required block icon and select the Edit > Copymenu command.

4. Toggle to your process picture and select the Edit > Paste menu command.This pastes the block icon onto your process picture.

This block icon is not yet linked to a measuring point.

7.2.7.2 How to Connect Block Icons to a Measuring Point

Requirement

The block icons already appear on your process picture.

Connecting Block Icons to a Measuring Point

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If you cannot see the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.

3. On the process picture, select the required block icon.

4. In the toolbar, toggle to the "Standard Functions" tab.

5. Double-click "Connect Picture Block to Tag Structure."This starts up the wizard.

6. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Set Options" step is displayed.

7. In "Set Options," click the "Browse" button next to the text box.This opens the tag selection dialog.When the ready-made block icon is used, the available measuring points areautomatically filtered so that you can only select measuring points that aresuitable for that particular block icon.

8. Select the tag display you require: "WinCC Tags" or "ES variables."

9. In the detail window, select the required measuring point and click "OK."The name of the measuring point is entered in the text box of the wizard.

10. Click "Next."The "Done" step is displayed.

11. Review your setting and – if no corrections are required – click "Finish."The faceplate is now linked to the required measuring point, and the name ofthis measuring point is displayed in the title bar of the block icon.

Page 122: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-8 A5E00164212-01

7.2.7.3 How to Connect Any Object to a Faceplate

Note

In general, you will work with the block icons provided by PCS 7. In special cases,you can use other picture objects.

Requirement

The picture object you want to connect to a faceplate is already inserted.

Setting Options with the Wizard

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. Select the required picture object.

3. If you cannot see the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.

4. In the toolbar, toggle to the "Picture Functions" tab.

5. Double-click "Picture Selection via Measuring Point."This starts up the wizard.

6. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Select Trigger" step is opened.

7. Select the required trigger.This defines the event that enables the plant operator to open the faceplateduring runtime.

8. Click "Next."The "Set Options" step is displayed.

9. In "Set Options," highlight the required tag structure type and click "Next."This opens the next "Set Options" step.

10. In this step, click the "Browse" button next to the text box.This opens the Tag Selection dialog, which only displays measuring points thatcorrespond to the previously selected structure type.

11. In the detail view, select the required measuring point and click "OK."The measuring point is now accepted and the tag selection dialog is closed.

12. Activate the option button for the required display type.You will find information about display types under "Display Types forFaceplates".

13. Click "Next."The "Done" step is displayed.

14. Review your setting and – if no corrections are required – click "Finish."The picture object is now linked to the required measuring point.

Page 123: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-9

7.3 Displaying Alarm Messages

7.3.1 Using a Message Window – Alarm Control

You have the option of configuring a special message window in a process picture.You can view messages in this message window without having to toggle to themessage list during process operation. You also have the option of creatingdetailed settings for this message window. This includes the following settings:

• You can choose what type of messages are displayed.

• You can specify the information to be provided in the individual messageblocks.

• You can set the exact contents of the message line.

• Etc.

You will find detailed information about the alarm system settings and functionsunder "Settings for the Alarm System > Alarm System Overview".

7.3.1.1 How to Insert an Alarm Control

1. In the Graphics Designer, open the process picture in which you would like tointegrate a message window.

2. If you cannot see the "Object Palette" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and activate the "Objects" check box in the Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette opens.

3. In the toolbar, toggle to the "Controls" tab.

4. Select "WinCC Alarm Control."

5. Use the mouse to switch to the workspace.The mouse cursor changes according to the object selected.

6. Holding the mouse button down, drag a rectangle corresponding to the size ofyour object.The "Properties of WinCC Alarm Control Rapid Configuration" dialog opens.

7. Input the required information in this dialog.You will find information about the individual text boxes and option buttons inWinCC Help.

Page 124: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-10 A5E00164212-01

8. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.

9. Now select the View > Properties menu command to specify properties andevents.You will find information about the individual text boxes and option buttons inWinCC Help.

10. Now double-click the object.The "Properties of WinCC Alarm Control" dialog opens.

11. Specify the settings you want in this dialog.You will find information about the individual text boxes and option buttons inWinCC Help.

12. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.

Page 125: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-11

7.4 Using and Creating User Objects

7.4.1 Using and Creating User Objects

A user object is a dynamic object consisting of single objects, for which you candefine the properties that you actually require. For example, you can implementgroup displays, I/O fields, and status displays as single objects. You specify theproperties once for all invariable attributes, and you can then always implement theuser object without having to configure single objects and assemble them as anobject for each use.

For each single object, only those properties required for the user object are madevisible. These properties can either be assigned as parameters or they can bemade dynamic. Thus, only selected properties are visible for each object, whichconsiderably simplifies linkage of objects to tags. These properties can also beaccessed by other WinCC applications, such as Script.

StaticText

0.0000

User object EventObject modifica-tion

Properties

Display 1

Display 2

Text

C action

… CTRL_PID.PV_IN

Text: Object type

Output value

Page 126: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-12 A5E00164212-01

Application of User Objects

It is always useful to create specific user blocks if you wish to display informationabout particular technology blocks during process operation that is not provided bystandard faceplates. In addition, it is useful to create user blocks if you havecreated your own block type by compiling a continuous function chart (CFC) in theCFC editor.

Storing User Objects for Multiple Applications

To facilitate implementation of multiple applications, you can store user objects in alibrary. User objects taken from a library are copies of the original. In this way, youcan make subsequent, specific changes and adjustments to each copy – ifnecessary – without overwriting these adjustments if the original is modified.

Note

Clicking the user object to display a faceplate is not a default option.

7.4.2 Advantages of User Objects as Compared to Single Objects

Creating a user object has the following advantages as compared to using singleobjects:

• With user objects you work with a manageable number of properties: thoseproperties that you actually assign as parameters or that you must makedynamic. This eliminates the need for you to select from a large,unmanageable number of properties common to all single objects.

• If the name of the block or continuous function chart (CFC) is changed, youneed only make these changes on the user object copies, rather than on eachsingle object.

• User objects can be modified and supplemented with additional objects at anytime.

• You have the option of configuring user objects in a particular language – usingthe languages installed in WinCC.

• If you use C actions, only one large C action needs to be executed duringruntime, rather than many small C actions. This is much better for performancereasons.

For additional information about user objects, refer to WinCC Help.

Page 127: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-13

7.4.2.1 Configuration Steps for User Objects Overview

The following is an overview of the steps for creating user objects

Step Action

1 Create user object from single objects

2 Configure user object

3 Assign property parameters

4 Place user object in library for multiple use

5 Insert and instantiate user object in the process picture

6 For subsequent changes: Edit user object

7.4.2.2 Step 1 – How to Create a User Object

1. Open a process picture in Graphics Designer.

2. Insert a single object that you want to integrate into the user object, forexample, a group display, a status display, or static text.

3. If a configuration dialog is displayed, click "Cancel."This closes the configuration dialog. You will not connect the tag until later.

4. Select the single object and select the View > Properties menu command.The "Object Properties" dialog will open with an activated "Properties" tab.

5. In the "Object Name" attribute, enter a brief, self-explanatory name for thesingle object.

6. Define all static properties, such as colors and font attributes.The object will be made dynamic in a separate step.

Note

If you place an "@" sign in front of the attribute name, the property will not bevisible in the "Object Properties" dialog, but the property will still be accessible viaa script.

7. Close the "Object Properties" dialog.

8. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for all remaining single objects.

9. Position the single objects as they are to appear in the user object.

10. Use the mouse to drag a box around all single objects and highlight them..

11. Select the Edit > User Object > Create menu command.The "User Object" configuration dialog opens, and the "Properties" tab isdisplayed.In this dialog, you make all settings that apply to the entire user object.

Page 128: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-14 A5E00164212-01

7.4.2.3 Step 2 – How to Configure a User Object

1. Open the configuration dialog for the user object.

If … … Then

You have created a new user object The configuration dialog is automaticallydisplayed

You want to change the configurationlater

Select the Edit > User Object >Configuration Dialog menu command

2. In the "Object Type" text box, enter a meaningful name for the user object.

3. If you want to add additional properties from the "Selected Properties" list:

- Select any property and open the shortcut menu.

- Select the "Topic Selection" command.

- From the "All Topics" list, select the topic you want to add to the "SelectedTopics" list.

- Click the arrow key to accept the topic.

- Click "OK" to save your input.

4. In the "Objects" list, select the object containing the properties you want to addto the user object.In the "Properties" list, all properties generally available for the selected singleobject are displayed.

5. Use a drag-and-drop operation to add the required property to the "User-Defined" area of the "Selected Properties" list.This inserts the property with its associated object name. This same propertycan be assigned a particular value at a later time.

Notice

Be aware that when a group display is used in the user object, the properties"Group Value," Relating to Group," and "Group Display Bit Pattern" must be madevisible. That is, these properties must be defined as properties for the user object.Only in this way can states be recorded and acknowledged.

6. Repeat steps 4 to 5 until you have defined all properties for the new userobject.

7. Switch to the "Event" tab.

8. In the "Objects" list, select the object for which you want to specify an event.In the "Event" list, all events generally available for the selected single objectare displayed.

Page 129: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-15

9. Now use a drag-and-drop operation to add the required event to the associatedentry in the "Selected Events" list, for example, add the event "Mouse Click" tothe entry "Mouse."You can then link this event to a script, for example.

10. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to define additional events.

Notice

Take care not to define more than one event, for example, events for both theoverall user object and for single objects. This can lead to overlaps when theevent is executed during process operation.

11. Click "OK" to save your inputs.

7.4.2.4 Step 3 – How to Assign Property Parameters

You have already defined properties for the user object in the configuration dialog.You must now input values for these properties. In this dialog, you define only thedynamic properties, since you already defined the static properties in the singleobjects.

1. Select the user object.

2. Select the View > Properties menu command.The "Object Properties" dialog will open with an activated "Properties" tab.

3. In the tree structure, select the "User Object" entry.

4. Switch to the detail window and input an intuitive name for the user object inthe "Object Name" attribute.

5. In the tree structure, select the "User-Defined" entry.When you configured the user object, you placed all the properties required forthe user object in this entry.

6. Switch to the detail window and double-click the "Dynamic" column for therequired attribute.A box will be displayed.

7. Enter the tag to which the attribute is to be connected. Use a general format forthe tag name – a name with a preceding dot, for example ".PV_OUT."

8. Press "Enter" to confirm your input.The tag is now entered in the "Dynamic" column, and the "light bulb" icon turnsgreen.

9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 to link tags for all attributes.

Note

The "Group Value" and "Group-Related" attributes must be linked to the"EventState" tag.

Page 130: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-16 A5E00164212-01

7.4.2.5 Step 4 – How to File a User Object

1. Open the Graphics Designer.

2. Select the View > Library menu command.This opens the libraries.

3. If you are creating many user objects, set up a new directory in your projectlibrary. To do this, click "New Directory" and assign an intuitive name for thelibrary.

4. In the process picture, select the user object you want to place in your libraryand perform the Edit > Copy menu command.

5. Switch to the library and in the tree structure, select the directory in which youwant to place the user object.

6. On the library toolbar, click "Insert."The user object is now filed in the library.

7. Select the user object and open the shortcut menu.

8. Select the Rename menu command.

9. Enter an intuitive name for the user object. Use the same object name youused in the user object properties. This ensures consistency in themanagement of user objects.

7.4.2.6 Step 5 – How to Insert a User Object

Requirement

You have already placed the user object in the library.

Overview of Substeps

User objects are inserted in two steps:

Step Action

A Insert user object – you insert the user object in the process picture

B Connect user object to block – you connect the user object to a physicalblock.

Page 131: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-17

Step A: Inserting a User Object

1. Open the Graphics Designer.

2. Select the View > Library menu command.This opens the libraries.

3. In the tree structure, select the directory in which you have placed your userobjects.

4. In the detail view, select the user object that you want to insert in your processpicture.

5. On the library toolbar, click "Copy."

6. Toggle to the process picture and select the Edit > Insert menu command.This pastes the user object into the process picture.

Step B: Linking the User Object to a Block

1. If you cannot see the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.

2. In the toolbar, toggle to the "Standard Dynamics" tab.

3. Double-click "Link a prototype to a structure or rename an existing link."This starts up the wizard.

4. In the first step of the wizard, click "Next."The "Set Options" step is displayed.

5. In "Set Options," click the "Browse" button next to the "Instance NameStructure" text box.This opens the tag selection dialog.

6. In the detail view, select the required block and click "OK."The required block is now accepted and the tag selection dialog is closed.

Note

Use the filter function in this dialog for many tags. For more information, refer toWinCC Help.

7. Click "Next."The "Finished!" step is displayed.

8. Review your setting and – if no corrections are required – click "Finish."This links the attributes of all properties to a specific block in one step.

Page 132: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-18 A5E00164212-01

7.4.2.7 Step 6 – How to Edit a User Object

Use the following procedure to make subsequent changes to the user object:

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer and select the user object.

2. Select the Edit > User Object > Edit... menu commandAll single objects can now be selected.

Caution

You must not under any circumstances remove the user object, as this wouldcause all configurations to be lost.

3. Click anywhere in the workspace.This clears all selections.

4. Select the single object you wish to edit.

5. Select the View > Properties menu command.The "Object Properties" dialog is displayed.

6. Modify the required properties.

7. Use the mouse to drag a box around all single objects and highlight them.

8. Select the Edit > User Object > Finish Editing... menu commandEditing is now finished.

Page 133: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-19

7.5 Working with User Object Templates

7.5.1 Using and Creating User Object Templates

If you have created user objects, you can use them to create so-called user objecttemplates. The major advantage of user object templates as compared to "simple"user objects is that you can make master changes to user objects, if required, andyou can use specific wizards to update all instances of the user object template inone step.

When using user object templates, you can use the functions of the Graphic ObjectUpdate Wizard, that is, you have the following options for user objects based on auser object template that you have used in a process picture:

• Update

• Export

• Import

• Modify connection

This section presents the basic procedure for creating user object templates andusing the associated wizards. For all additional information, refer to WinCC Help.

Requirements for Making Master Changes

The following requirements must be satisfied for you to use the master changefunction:

• Every object based on a user object template has a so-called type identifier.This means that you must define a "type" property in the properties of the userobject template, which is then carried over to the instance of the user objecttemplate. The wizard uses this property to explicitly identify these objects.

• You must place the user object templates in a so-called template file. Thetemplate file can be identified by its name, which is constructed as follows:@[NameOfTemplateFile].pdl.

Page 134: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-20 A5E00164212-01

7.5.2 Comparing User Objects and User Object Templates

The following table presents a comparison of user objects and user objecttemplates. Depending on your requirements for an object, you must decidewhether to use a user object or a user object template.

User Objects User Object Templates

When you implement a user objectfrom a library, you create a copy of theuser object, that is, these objects maynot be replaced subsequently.

When you implement a user objecttemplate, you create an instance, that is,you can make master changes to thetemplate, and these changes can then betransferred to all objects based on thetemplate.

User objects can only be editedindividually and only directly in theprocess picture.

Master editing of properties in an externalprogram, such as Excel, is possible.

7.5.3 Properties in User Object Templates

In user object templates, you must define various properties. To do so, you firstinsert picture objects to which you must then assign particular properties, so thatthey can be implemented as a user object template. The best picture object for thispurpose is the "I/O Field" smart object, because it is language-independent,meaning that you need only make the configuration in one language.

Property Requirement Purpose

Type When all functions of theGraphic Object UpdateWizard are to be used

Used for identification purposes whenyou work with individual wizards ofthe Graphic Object Update Wizard

Server name When a faceplate is to becalled

Designates the faceplate that can becalled from this user object with amouse click

Tag name When a faceplate is to becalled

Assigns the instance name to beused to call the faceplate – thiscorresponds to the so-called tagprefix

tag/NameOfTag

Not mandatory and notsupported by default

Used to input permanent text as atype of object header or name – thistext is visible in the process pictureand can be imported or exported andedited in a *.csv file

Page 135: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-21

7.5.4 User Object Templates and the Graphic Object Update Wizard

The "Graphic Object Update Wizard" is a generic term for various wizards at yourdisposal in PCS 7 OS. In the wizard settings, you can specify whether or thefunction should be executed only in the currently selected process picture or in allprocess pictures. The following different wizards are available:

• "Export Picture Objects"

• "Import Picture Objects"

• "Update Picture Objects"

• "Modify User Object Interconnection"

7.5.5 Wizards for Importing and Exporting Picture Objects

There is one wizard for exporting picture objects and one for importing pictureobjects:

• "Export Picture Objects" wizard

• "Import Picture Objects"

"Export Picture Objects" Wizard

This wizard exports the required information, such as object type or connectioninformation, from user objects to a *.csv file. This information can then be edited ina spreadsheet application, such as MS Excel. For example, you can modify theinterconnection of tags.

In addition, a configuration file of the same name is created during export. This filecan be edited to make particular settings for import.

"Import Picture Objects" Wizard

This wizard imports information required to create user objects in a process picturefrom a *.csv file. In this process, all user objects in the process picture and thetemplate file are first deleted.This function is generally executed if the "Export Picture Objects" wizard has beenlaunched, and the export data have been edited in the *.csv file.The validity or existence in the WinCC tag management of the OS tag names usedin the import file is not verified.

Page 136: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-22 A5E00164212-01

When executing the import functions, be aware of the following relationships:

If... … Then:

• The user object is in the template file

• The user object is in the processpicture

• The user object is in the *.csv file

... During import, all user objects arefirst deleted in the process picture

... Then, all user objects are reimportedfrom the *.csv file to the process picture

• The user object is in the processpicture

• The user object is in the template file

• The user object is not in the *.csv file

... During import, all objects are firstdeleted in the process picture

... Then, all user objects are reimportedfrom the *.csv fileBe aware that user objects that havebeen deleted from the process picture,but are not in the *.csv file, are notreinserted during this process.

• The user object is not in thetemplate file

• The user object is in the processpicture

• The user object is in the *.csv file

... Only user objects actually in thetemplate file are deletedIf there are any user objects in theprocess picture that are not in thetemplate file, then the import function isterminated with an error message.

Notice

Before performing the Import function, be sure to make a backup copy of theprocess picture to prevent unintentional deletion of user objects in your processpicture.

Caution

Because block icons are set up as user objects, they can be affected by theImport function.

You will find information about the import/export file and the configuration file inWinCC Help.

Page 137: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-23

7.5.6 Procedure for Importing and Exporting in the Graphic ObjectUpdate Wizard

In principle, the procedure for importing and exporting picture objects is identical:

Determining whether a single process picture or all process pictures of the project are to be searched

Determining the name forexport or import file

Find all objects which have the attribute “type"

Export function:

Import function:

storage of all informationfrom these objects in the csv export file

i from the *.csv file to the objects

import of all nformation

Information on the import-export file can be found in WinCC Help.

You can find additional information in the Process Control System PCS 7,WinCC Basic Process Control manual under the keyword "Graphic Object UpdateWizard."

Page 138: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-24 A5E00164212-01

7.5.7 Wizard for Picture Object Updates

This wizard updates all instances of the user object following modifications in themaster template.

If no follow-up changes are needed in the export file, the "Picture Object Update"wizard can be used. To do so, the relevant picture must be opened in the GraphicsDesigner.It is recommended that you create a backup copy of the picture, sincethis procedure cannot be undone.

Determining whether a single process picture or all the process pictures of the project are to be searched

Selection of the template file

Find all objects which have the property “type"and read out the entry of this property

Replacement of all objects with the same entry in the property "type"

7.5.8 Wizard to Modify a Tag Connection

This wizard is used to make subsequent modifications to individual tag connectionsof user object instances in process pictures, for example, a connection to anotherAS block instance.

You can use this Wizard to modify the dynamic connection to a user object. In theprocess, the instance name in front of the dot is replaced in the tag. Dynamicaspects of internal tags are not affected.

Page 139: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-25

7.5.8.1 How to Create a User Object Template

Note

To create a user object template, you should already have experience with theGraphics Designer and the different objects in the Object Palette.

Only the basic procedure is outlined below.

1. Open a new picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. Insert the "I/O Field" object and define the following object properties:This I/O field contains information enabling the various wizards to be used formaking changes.

Object Property > Attribute Optional/Mandatory

Object name Type Mandatory

Miscellaneous > Display No Mandatory

Output/Input > DataFormat

String Mandatory

Output/Input > OutputValue

[Input for "type" property]

You will generally input the name of theassociated block

Mandatory

3. If you want to call a faceplate from this user object, insert the following objectswith the following properties:

Object Property > Attribute Input Optional/Mandatory

I/O Field1 Object name Tag name Mandatory

Miscellaneous > Display No Mandatory

Output/Input > Data Format String Mandatory

I/O Field2 Object name Server name Mandatory

Miscellaneous > Display No Mandatory

Output/Input > Data Format String Mandatory

I/O Field3 Object name NameOfTag Optional

Miscellaneous > Display Yes Optional

Output/Input > Data Format String Mandatory

4. Insert all other single objects without a permanent tag connection, forexample, group displays and I/O fields.

5. Create a user object with the Edit > Create User Object menu command.

Page 140: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-26 A5E00164212-01

6. Complete the "User-Defined" information in the selected properties andrename it "General."You can also assign any other name of your choice.

7. In the configuration dialog in the "Object Type" box, enter the name of theassociated block, for example, "valve".

8. In the configuration dialog, define properties for the following objects, and setthe attribute name and name of the property:

Object Property Attribute Name Name of Property

Type Output value Type Type

Tag name Output value Tag name Tag name

NameOfTag Output value Tag Tag

Server name Output value Server name Server name

9. Make visible the properties of the other single objects that you need for theuser object template, for example, "Group Value," "Group-Related," and"Output Value," and click OK to confirm your entries. The procedure is thesame as for creating a user object.

10. Use the View > Properties menu command to open the object properties ofthe user object and specify the following object properties:

Property > Attribute Input

Object name Name of block

Only required if you did not make thissetting in step 2:

general > type

[Name of associated block]

All additional user-defined properties In accordance with projectrequirements

11. Create additional user object templates.

12. Save the file using a self-explanatory name and place the "@" sign in front ofthe file name to designate it as a template file.

Page 141: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-27

7.5.8.2 How to Work with the Graphic Object Update Wizard

The wizards included in the "Graphic Object Update Wizard" all function in thesame way. For this reason, the following instructions present only a generaldescription of how to work with these wizards.

1. Always make a backup copy of the process picture in which you carry outthese functions, since this process cannot be undone.

2. Open the process picture in which you wish to execute one of the followingfunctions:

- Update the user object

- Export or import user object template information

- Change a connection

3. If you cannot see the "Dynamic Wizard" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and select the "Dynamic Wizard" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.

4. In the toolbar, toggle to the "Picture Functions" tab.

5. Double-click the required wizard:

If … … Select

You want to update pictureobjects

"Update Picture Objects" wizard

In the wizard, specify the template file in which youhave placed the modified user object template, sothat the user object template in a picture can bereplaced by the user object template in the templatefile.

You want to changeconnections

"Change User Object Connection" wizard

In the wizard, specify the new structure type to beused to interconnect the user object templates inthe picture.

You want to export pictureobjects

"Export Picture Objects" wizard

In the wizard, specify the following information:

• Name of export file

• Name of configuration file – the configurationinformation will be written from this file to thenew configuration file. The new configurationfile will have the same name as the export file –as a rule, you will specify the defaultconfiguration file here.

• "Split Tag Name" option – This splits the tagname according to the plant hierarchy,providing a clearer overview and simplifying theediting process.

Page 142: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-28 A5E00164212-01

If … … Select

You want to import pictureobjects

"Import Picture Objects"

In the wizard, specify the following information:

• Name of import file

• Name of template file containing the user objecttemplates.

Make sure the import file contains only data fromobjects in your template file. If this is not the case,an error message will be displayed.

6. Click "Finish" to exit the wizard.

7.6 Using Picture Windows

7.6.1 Using a Picture Window

Picture windows are a type of "container" inside a process picture. A picturewindow can accommodate a picture, for example, one you have created for aparticular block and that you want to use several times at different points in theprocess visualization.

You must first create pictures you want to use in a process picture as a *.pdl file.This *.pdl file contains only generally applicable specifications, but no actual taglinks. Tag links are only prepared in the picture: this means that they are presentedvia a generally applicable name, such as ".PV_IN," and therefore do not have aspecific instance name.

Picture windows can be displayed dynamically "at the touch of a button" in theprocess picture and can be instantiated dynamically during operation. This is doneusing global scripts.

You will find more information on this topic in WinCC Configuration Manual,Volume 2.

Page 143: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-29

7.6.1.1 How to Use a Picture Window

When using a picture window, you must proceed in two steps:

Step Action

1 Create a *.pdl file in which the picture window is to be inserted

2 Insert the picture window in the process picture

Step 1 – Creating a *.pdl File

1. Open the Graphics Designer.

2. Create the picture with all information you want to display for the plant block

- Insert all static objects

- Insert all dynamic objects

- For the tag connection, enter the tag name in the form ".PV_IN," adding adot in front of the tag name. Under no circumstances should you connecta tag to an actual block instance.

3. Save the picture as a *.pdl file with a brief, self-explanatory name.

Note

You can also use an existing user object: To do so, insert the user object in a newpicture and save it as a *.pdl file.

Step 2 – Inserting a Picture Window

1. Open the process picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If you cannot see the "Object Palette" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and activate the "Objects" check box in the Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette opens.

3. If necessary, switch to the "Standard" tab in the Object Palette.

4. Under "Smart Objects," select the "Picture Window" object.

5. Using the mouse, place the cursor in the workspace and, while holding downthe mouse button, drag to open a rectangle.

6. Select the View > Properties menu command.The "Properties" tab of the "Object Properties" dialog opens.

Page 144: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-30 A5E00164212-01

7. Make the following settings:

Property Attributes Action

Picture window Object name Self-explanatory name for the picturewindow

Geometry • Window width Width of picture window, which must matchthe width of the inserted picture

• Window height Height of picture window, which must matchthe height of the inserted picture

Miscellaneous • Display Yes – this ensure that the picture window isalways visible

• Picture name Name of the picture to be displayed in thepicture window, for example, controller.pdl

• Tag prefix The instance name of the tag up to the dot,for example, RMT1/FC111/CTRL_PID

8. Close the "Object Properties" dialog.This confirms your settings.

Page 145: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-31

7.7 Working with Cross-reference Lists

7.7.1 Using the Process Object View in PCS 7 OS

The process object view is a view in the SIMATIC Manager that provides variousdetails about measuring points in your project.

Detailed information on the process object view can be found in the ProcessControl System PCS 7; Engineering System configuration manual.

You open the process object view in the SIMATIC Manager using the "View >Process Object View" menu command. For the PCS 7 OS, you need the "PictureObjects" tab to display picture assignments and interconnections.

7.7.2 General Information – Cross-Reference Lists

Cross-reference lists provide a good overview of all tags you have used in yourproject.

Cross-reference lists also provide the following options for a PCS 7 project:

• You can view all points of application of specific objects, such as tags andpictures, in a cross-reference list.

• You can delete a tag at a point of application by switching directly to that pointof application from the cross-reference list.

• You can modify the name of one or more tags via the "Linking" function withoutcausing inconsistencies in the configuration. This function can also be used tosearch for and replace character strings in tag names.

You use the WinCC "Cross Reference" editor to create or open an existing crossreference list.

Page 146: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-32 A5E00164212-01

Point of Application

The "Go to Point of Application" function initiates the following actions – dependingon the origin of the tags:

Tag Origin Associated Editor Action when "Point of Application"Function Is Executed

Archive Tag Logging Editor is launched

No further action

Message Alarm Logging Editor is launched

No further action

Function Global Script Editor is launched and function isdisplayed

Picture object Graphics Designer Editor is launched and object isselected in process picture

Tag WinCC Explorer Explorer is brought to the front

No further action

You will find information on the data window, the interface, and the individualfunctions of the WinCC "Cross Reference" editor in WinCC Help.

7.7.3 Using Cross-Reference Lists in PCS 7 OS

In the PCS 7 environment, a cross-reference list is important mainly as a way tocheck for detection of so-called non-existent tags.

Each time the OS is configured, the tag management is automatically updated, thatis, all tags that are no longer required, for example, because the continuousfunction chart (CFC) has been deleted, are automatically deleted in the tagmanagement. The connections you made for dynamic objects in a process pictureare retained, but become invalid because the target of the tag connection to thecontinuous function chart (CFC) is deleted.

Notes

• Always execute the "Compile OS" function before working with a cross-reference list. This ensures that you are working with current data.

• Cross-reference lists also display all tags from process pictures that are usedas templates. These are all pictures with an "@" sign in front of the file name.You do not need to take these tags into account.

Page 147: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-33

Non-Existent Tags

Non-existent tags can result from the following operations:

• In the SIMATIC Manager, you deleted a continuous function chart in the planthierarchy with block instances that you connected in the process picture.

• You have inserted a dynamic object or a user object, for example, in a processpicture, but you have not yet connected it to a tag.

Overview of Steps

Follow the steps below when working with cross-reference lists in the PCS 7environment:

Step Action

1 Create a cross-reference list

2 Switch to a point of application

3 Make corrections

7.7.4 Comparing Process Object View and Cross-Reference Lists

The "Picture objects" tab in the process object view and the cross-reference lists inWinCC provide various functions for you to use, depending on the type of work youwish to accomplish:

Cross-Reference List

• You can view connections to non-existent tags.

• This WinCC function enables you to make corrections in the connections.

Process Object View, "Picture Objects" Tab

• You can also view picture connections for the entire plant or separatelyaccording to different plant sections.

• In addition to picture connections, you will find the associated pictureassignments here. This provides you with a good overview of missing orincorrectly configured picture objects.

• From the process object view, you can also access other information about themeasuring point, such as signals, messages, and measured value archives.

Page 148: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-34 A5E00164212-01

7.7.4.1 Step 1 – How to Create a Cross-Reference List

1. Open WinCC Explorer.

2. Select the Editors > Cross Reference > Open menu command.This launches the "Cross Reference" editor.

3. Select the File > New menu command.This opens the "Edit Filter" dialog.

4. Configure your settings for the filter.

- In the "Search for" area, select the "Tags" entry from the drop-down listbox.

- In the "Search for" area, select "Non-existent Used."

- In the "Search for" area, select all option boxes.

5. Click "Start Search."This opens a data window displaying all tags that correspond to the filtercriterion setting.The cross-reference list also displays all tags from the template pictures, whichare irrelevant for you. These tags can be identified by the "@" sign in front ofthe tag name.You will find information about the data window and the individual columns inWinCC Help.

6. Choose a self-explanatory name to save the file.The file is now displayed in the detail window of WinCC Explorer and can beopened at any time.

7.7.4.2 Step 2 – How to Switch to a Point of Application

1. Open or create a cross-reference list in the WinCC "Cross Reference" editor.

2. Select the required "Containing Element" or the "Object" for which you want tosee an application record, for example, the "Status Display" object.

3. Select the Edit > Go To menu command.

If… … Then …

You click an entry in the "ContainingElement" column and look for the pointof application,

The Graphics Designer opens with theassociated process picture.

You click an entry in the "Object"column and look for the point ofapplication

The Graphics Designer opens with theassociated process picture, and the objectyou searched for is automaticallyhighlighted in the process picture.

4. Make the settings corrections.

Page 149: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-35

7.7.4.3 Step 3 – How to Make Corrections

You can correct faulty tag connections in the following editors:

• Graphics Designer – here – as usual – you set up the tag connection using thetag selection dialog.

• Cross Reference – here, you use the "Linking" function presented below.

"Rewire"

1. Open the cross-reference list in the WinCC "Cross Reference" editor.

2. Select the required "Containing Element" or the "Object" for which you wish tocorrect the connection. You can perform this function with both objects.

3. Select the Edit > Rewire... menu command.This opens the "Rewire" dialog.

4. Click the "Browse" button next to the "Replace by" text box.This opens the tag selection dialog.

5. Select the required tag and click "OK."The required tag is now confirmed and the tag selection dialog is closed.

6. Click "Replace."The tag connection is now modified.

7. Click "Close."This closes the "Rewire" dialog; when the cross-reference list is updated, thetag will no longer be displayed as "Used, not existing."

Page 150: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-36 A5E00164212-01

7.8 Using the Picture Tree Manager

7.8.1 Function of the Picture Tree Manager

After you execute the "Compile OS" function, the Picture Tree Manager displaysthe structure of the plant hierarchy. In order this to be possible, you must havealready activated this option in the plant hierarchy settings of the SIMATICManager. The hierarchy levels you created in the SIMATIC Manager show up withthe same names in the Picture Tree Manager: If, for example, you created ahierarchy level "Plant1" in the SIMATIC Manager, the Picture Tree Manager willhave a hierarchy level by the same name. In addition, the Picture Tree Managershows which picture is contained in this hierarchy folder.

At the bottom of the Picture Tree Manager, you will find all of the pictures that arenot inserted in the plant hierarchy. In the PCS 7 environment, these are thepictures that you create additionally, because, for example, you want to displaythem in a picture window of the process picture.

Requirements

Certain requirements must be satisfied for the plant hierarchy structure to bedisplayed in the Picture Tree Manager:

• The Picture Tree Manager only displays hierarchy folders in which you haveinserted a picture.

• In addition, a picture must always be inserted in the top hierarchy folder;otherwise, the hierarchy folders below will not be displayed.

When pictures are inserted, you must bear in mind that only one picture perhierarchy folder can be inserted.

Caution

Avoid making changes, such as inserting additional hierarchy levels or containersand renaming pictures, directly in the "Picture Tree Manager" editor in WinCC:The data you see in the Picture Tree Manager come from the configuration data ofthe SIMATIC Manager. Subsequent changes can be overwritten when"Compile OS" is reexecuted if you have activated the "Base Picture Hierarchy onPlant Hierarchy" option.

Page 151: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 7-37

Picture Tree Manager and User Authorization

The hierarchy levels of the Picture Tree Manager are available you assign userauthorization. You must make or change user authorization settings in the followingcases:

• If you create new areas in the plant hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager or thePicture Tree Manager

• If you change the hierarchy in the plant hierarchy of the SIMATIC Manager orthe Picture Tree Manager

You must set new user authorization for these new areas. You must specify userauthorization both on the OS server and on the OS client after importing serverpackages.

7.8.2 Calculating the Group Display Hierarchy

If you insert group displays into the process picture, the group display messageswill not be displayed in the overview area or the process pictures during processoperation until you have saved the plant hierarchy in the Picture Tree Manager.Before saving the picture hierarchy, you must activate the following options:

If … … Then

You are calculating the groupdisplay hierarchy for the first time

Select the "Options > Calculate the GroupDisplay Hierarchy Completely New Again whileSaving" menu command

You want to update the groupdisplay hierarchy after makingchanges

Select the "Options > Delta Save" menucommand

If there are still no messages displayed in the overview area, then close andreopen WinCC Explorer.

Page 152: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Creating Process Pictures – Advanced

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station7-38 A5E00164212-01

Page 153: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-1

8 Alarm System Settings

8.1 Alarm System Overview

During process operation, process messages and process control messages aredisplayed as a message list for the plant operator:

Overview

Element bar

Message list

Using the "Loop-in Alarm" function, you can quickly toggle from the message list tothe picture or faceplate of the associated measuring point.

The alarm system thus ensures the following:

• Detailed information about fault and operating states

• Early detection of critical situations

• Prevention and reduction of downtime

• Increased product quality

Page 154: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-2 A5E00164212-01

Information Units of a Message

A single message comprises various pieces of information. These individual piecesof information are known as message blocks, which are divided into three areas:

• System blocks – System blocks contain system data assigned by the AlarmLogging editor. These data include date, time, and logging ID.

• Process value blocks – Process value blocks contain values determined duringthe process, such as critical fill levels and temperatures.

• User text blocks – User text blocks contain messages texts, for example,message clarifications, fault locations, and cause of message that providegeneral information and an overview of the system.

The contents of the system blocks are fixed. You can change the contents of theprocess value blocks and user text blocks according to your requirements.

Configuring the Alarm System

You configure the settings for the alarm system in two different places in WinCCExplorer:

• Project Editor

• "Alarm Logging" Editor

The data you have configured in the PCS 7 Engineering System are integrated intoWinCC when you execute the "Compile OS" function.

8.2 OS Project Editor Settings

8.2.1 Settings for the Alarm System in the OS Project Editor

Certain settings for the alarm system are made in the Project editor. Use thefollowing menu command to call the Project editor in WinCC Explorer:

"Editors > Project Editor > Open > Message Configuration Tab"

For PCS 7, you generally do not need to make any additional settings.

Attention

Make the following setting to allow the plant operator to acknowledge only thosemessages that have been enabled for his area:

1. Switch to the "Runtime Window" tab in the project editor.

2. Activate the "Acknowledgeable messages in separate list" option in the"Message filter" field.This displays two separate message lists in the process mode: one listcontaining all messages, the other list and the message line in the overviewarea contain only the messages that the plant operator is allowed toacknowledge.

Page 155: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-3

If you wish to make changes to the default settings, the Project editor provides thefollowing options:

• Column width settings for individual message blocks in the message window.For certain message blocks, you can also make formatting specifications.

• Selection of messages to be displayed

• Filter settings for a specific area

For more information about settings in the Project editor, refer to WinCC Help.

8.3 Settings in the 'Alarm Logging' Editor

8.3.1 Settings for the Alarm System in Alarm Logging

Alarm Logging is used for the following functions during message execution:

• Acceptance of messages from processes

• Preparation and display during process operation

• Acknowledgement by plant operator

• Archiving

In Alarm Logging, you can configure the following settings to modify the defaultsettings:

• Layout settings for individual message blocks – here, you can furthercustomize the default settings that you made in the Project editor.

• Layout specifications for the different message classes – here, you can changethe message type names and background and font colors.

• Group messages – here, you can put individual messages together to formgroup messages.

You will find a detailed description of Alarm Logging in the SIMATIC HMI WinCC,Volume 2/2 manual and in WinCC Help.

Page 156: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-4 A5E00164212-01

8.3.2 Relationship between Alarm Logging and PCS 7

In WinCC Explorer, you are not required to make any additional settings for theAlarm Logging functions because all required settings have already been made inthe SIMATIC Manager and transferred to the OS via the "Compile OS" function.

Settings in the SIMATIC Manager

You have already input any required special message texts in the SIMATICManager: this was done in the block properties of a block instance in a continuousfunction chart (CFC). You have also made the AS-OS assignment in the plant viewof the SIMATIC Manager. No additional inputs are required, and the standardmessages are simply accepted. The messages with associated message texts areaccepted with the "Compile OS" function.

You will find information on this topic in "Configuring OS Data in the SIMATICManager > Preparing for OS Configuration > Configuring Messages".

Message Numbers

Each message configured in the ES when the PCS 7 OS is compiled isautomatically assigned a unique message number in Alarm Logging. An 8-bit rangeis reserved within these message numbers to create a unique reference to theassociated AS. This ensures that multiple PLCs can be monitored by one operatorstation, and that the messages seen by the plant operator during process operationcan be assigned to the correct AS.

If an AS is to be monitored by more than one OS Server, then the ID assigned tothe AS in the message number is different in each OS.

8.3.3 Using Message Lists during Process Operation

During process operation, the plant operator can call the message list by means ofa button. From there, you can call additional message lists. The following messagelists are available:

• New list – displays all unacknowledged messages

• Old list – displays all messages that have been acknowledged but are stillpending in the process

• "Gone" list – displays all messages identified as "Gone" and are notacknowledged

• Operation list – displays all operation messages

• Process list – displays all process messages, such as for a rack failure

• Journal – Displays all messages

Page 157: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-5

8.3.4 Properties of Message Lists

Message lists viewed by the plant operator during process operation have specificproperties that can be changed according to your requirements:

• Layout specifications

• Message block selection

• Specification of sort criteria

• Etc.

The most important specification in the PCS 7 environment is the specification ofsort criteria. As you have already specified message priorities for the individualblock types or block instances in the ES, you can use these message priorities as asort criterion for message lists.

By default, a sort criterion is not set for message lists. During process operation,messages are displayed in the order in which they are triggered.

Each message list is based on a *.pdl file, that is, a picture in the GraphicsDesigner. You can define properties for these pictures as required.

In order to specify properties, you must know which files contain which messagelists:

Message List Type File Name

"Gone" list @AlarmGone.pdl

Journal list @AlarmJournal.pdl

New list @AlarmNew.pdl

Old list @AlarmOld.pdl

Operation list @AlarmOperation.pdl

Process list @AlarmProcess.pdl

One-line message in overview area @AlarmOneLine.pdl

8.3.5 System Message Types Overview

WinCC Alarm Logging has the two following system message types:

• System messages

• Operation messages

System Messages

System messages are generated by the system, for example, in the event ofsystem component failure.

When the "Compile OS" function is executed, approximately 140 system messagesrelating to the operator station are generated.

Additional information on system messages can be found in WinCC Help.

Page 158: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-6 A5E00164212-01

The following abbreviations are used in the online Help system:

Name Meaning

WCCRT WinCC runtime general

PDLRT Picture editing runtime

TLGRT Tag Logging runtime

ALGRT Alarm Logging runtime

NRMS7 S7 format DLL

RPTRT Report runtime

TXTRT Text Library runtime

GSCRT Global Script runtime

SCRIPT Script editing

USERT User administrator

LBMRT Lifebeat monitoring

STRRT Storage runtime

STORAGE STORAGE

CSIG Picture Tree Manager

SYNC Time synchronization

REDRT Redundancy runtime

SWITCH Project switcher

SWRED SW redundancy

Operation messages

During process operation, these messages are generated by operations, forexample, changing the setpoint.

8.3.5.1 How to Define Properties for Message Lists

1. Open the message list picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. Double-click the picture.This opens the "Properties of WinCC Alarm Control" dialog, whereby the"General" tab is selected.

3. Click "Sort."This opens the "Sort" dialog.

4. In the "Sort By" drop-down list, select "Priority."

Note

"Priority" is only displayed if you have uniquely specified the message numberrange for the CPU.

If you want to specify other sort criteria, you can make additional selections.

Page 159: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-7

5. Select "Increasing" – this displays the highest-priority message first.

6. If required, specify additional sort criteria.

7. Change tabs to make specifications regarding the layout or the messageblocks displayed.

8. Select the File> Save menu command.

8.4 Using and Configuring the Horn

8.4.1 Function of the Horn

In addition to a visual representation of messages and alarms, certain messagesmight require an acoustic representation. In PCS 7 OS, the "Horn" function isavailable for this purpose with the following options:

• You can connect a signal module to an ISA or PCI interface in the operatorstation. Up to three different external sensors, for example, three horns or threedifferent lamp lights, can be controlled for different message classes.Moreover, connecting a signal module enables lifebeat monitoring.

You will find information about the function and installation of signal modulesunder "Hardware Options" in the Process Control System PCS 7, WinCC BasicProcess Control manual.

• You can use a standard sound card, which is installed in the operator station.The Horn is created by means of a *.wav file that plays until the signal isacknowledged. If multiple alarms are pending at once, all *.wav files are playedat once.Lifebeat monitoring cannot be implemented with a sound card.

It is possible to have a hybrid operation of signal modules and sound cards.

You configure the horn in the "horn" editor, which you can access in WinCCExplorer via the following menu command:

"Editors > Horn> Open"

Page 160: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-8 A5E00164212-01

8.4.2 Functioning of Signal Tags

As soon as a message is generated in the AS, the corresponding acoustic signalmust be triggered. Control is executed by means of a signal tag that is linked to amessage class and/or a message priority of the corresponding message.

The signal tag must be created specifically in the WinCC tag management beforethe horn is configured.

The principle during process operation is the following: A message with a particularmessage class and/or message priority is triggered, and the associated tag is setto "1". Thus, the associated alarm, represented by a signal module and/or a *.wavfile, can be triggered. The message class and message priority are linked bymeans of an AND logic operation, that is, during process operation, a messagemust have the specified message class and/or message priority to set the signaltag and trigger the alarm.

8.4.3 Acknowledging Signals

A horn signal can be acknowledged without acknowledgment of the message thattriggered the alarm. A plant operator can acknowledge a horn signal even withoutspecial user authorization. As soon as the message that triggered an acousticsignal is acknowledged, the associated signal tag is set to "0" and the acousticsignal is discontinued. Acknowledgment of the message that triggered the alarmdepends on the user authorization defined.

If … … Then

You want to acknowledge the alarm You do not need special userauthorization

You want to acknowledge the message You must have the required userauthorization

Signal variables are used to control whether an alarm can be acknowledged locallyor centrally:

If… … Then

The signal tag is defined on an OSserver, and the OS clients areconnected to this signal tag,

The alarm can be acknowledged centrally

The signal tag is defined on an OSclient

The alarm can only be acknowledgedlocally.

Page 161: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-9

8.4.4 Setting in the "Horn" Editor

The "Horn" editor has two tabs that you can use to configure settings:

• "Message assignment": You assign a message class and/or message priorityto a particular signal tag. You can also link message classes and priorities touser authorizations.

• "Signal assignment":You assign the signal tag to a signal module and/or a*.wav file

8.4.5 Settings in the "Message Assignment" Tab

You must make settings in the "Message Assignment" tab. If you fail to do so,alarm messages will not be generated during process operation.

The following is applicable for message assignment:

• The same signal tag can be assigned to multiple message classes andmessage priorities.

• Moreover, user authorization can be assigned to a signal tag. If userauthorization has not been defined, the same authorization automaticallyapplies for the signal as for the associated message. This is the "Enable forArea" authorization. If additional user authorizations are assigned, then onlysignals belonging to the area to which the user has access are triggered.User authorizations are assigned by user group, rather than by individualusers. This allows for more flexibility, for example, if user names change.

Input Example:

Message Class

(Message Class)

Message Priority

(Priority)

Authorization

(Function)

Tag

(Signal Tag)

Alarm 1 [Enable for area] horn_1

Tolerance 3 [Monitor] horn_1

System, requiresacknowledgement

3 [Process conditions] horn_2

You can use the "Not for an unacknowledged incoming message" option tosuppress so-called "chatter messages" that come in, go out, and come in againWhen this option is activated, chatter messages are only triggered once. They canonly be retriggered after acknowledgement.

Page 162: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-10 A5E00164212-01

8.4.6 Settings in the "Signal Assignment" Tab

Each signal tag, in turn, is assigned to a particular signal module and/or *.wav file.These settings are mandatory so that the function can be executed correctly duringprocess operation. The signal is triggered as soon as the assigned signal tag is setto "1."

Input Example:

Tag

(Signal Tag)

Signal Module Sound

(*.wav File)

horn_1 Output 1 alarm.wav

horn_1 Output 1 warning.wav

horn_2 Output 3 tolerance.wav

A signal module and a *.wav file can be triggered simultaneously. Furthermore,various signal tags can be assigned to a signal module.

8.4.6.1 How to Configure a Horn

Requirement

Signal tags must have been defined previously in the WinCC tag management.

Proceed as follows …

1. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editors > Horn > Open menu command.The "Horn" dialog is displayed.Depending on the type of entries you must make, double-clicking the tablecells with activate either a drop-down list or the "Browse" button.

2. Select the "Message Assignment" tab and specify the assignment of messageclasses and/or message priorities to signal tags and user authorizations:

- Message class – select the required priority from the drop-down list

- Priority – specify the required message priority

- Tag – open the tag selection dialog using the "Browse" button and selectthe required signal tag.

- Trigger horn – select the user authorization from the drop-down list. Thissetting is optional.

3. In the "Set Tag" area, activate the "Not during Incoming UnacknowledgedMessage" to suppress chatter messages.

Page 163: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 8-11

4. Click the "Apply" button to confirm your entries for this tab.

5. Switch to the "Signal Assignment" tab and assign signal tags to signal modulesand/or sound files:

- Signal tag – click "Browse" to open the tag selection dialog.

- Signal module – select the required signal module from the drop-down list.

- Sound file – click "Browse" to open the "Open" dialog and select therequired *.wav file. This requires a sound card to be installed.

6. If multiple acknowledgement is to be permitted, select the required option inthe "Acknowledgement of Horn" area and input the appropriate acknowlegmenttags for multiple acknowledgement.

7. Click "OK" to apply your inputs.

Additional information on this dialog can be found in WinCC Help.

Page 164: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Alarm System Settings

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station8-12 A5E00164212-01

Page 165: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-1

9 Archiving Options

9.1 Archiving and Reports Overview

There are several ways to archive process values, such as measured values ormessages, electronically. The different archives can be configured in the followingeditors:

• Tag Logging – to archive process values

• Alarm Logging – to archive messages

• Report Designer – to design the layout of process value or message printouts

All archives are so-called cyclic archives, that is, archives with a particular capacity.As soon as the maximum capacity is reached, the oldest values are deleted so thatnew values can be saved. This is known as the FiFo (First in first out) principle.

The Report Designer is used to print saved data in an appropriate layout.

Archive Server

A special function is the creation of an archive server. The archive server is usedexclusively to archive process data from OS servers by means of Tag Logging.

You will find additional information about the archive server under "Using Server-to-Server Communication – Using an Archive Server – Configuring a CentralArchive Server".

Page 166: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-2 A5E00164212-01

9.2 Using Tag Logging

9.2.1 Archiving in Tag Logging Overview

Overview

You have the following options with Tag Logging:

• You can save values measured during process operation in archives that youcreate individually. Archiving is started as soon as the project is in processoperation. This means that the archiving process creates a permanent,additional load during process operation. For this reason, when processingmany values, you should set up a specific server to be used only for archivingpurposes. This greatly reduces the load on the OS server.

• You can define particular settings for archives relating to archive size andbackup options.

• Measured values from the archives can be displayed on the operator station ascurves or tables. You can configure the curves either during configuration orduring process operation. For this purpose, the dynamic objects "Online TrendControl" or "Function Trend Control" are inserted in a process picture.

Detailed information about Tag Logging can be found in the SIMATIC HMI WinCCVolume 2/2 and in WinCC Help manual.

Archives

The Archive Wizard will guide you through the process of creating an archive.When you create an archive, you specify the required archive type:

• Process Value Archive – all values are written from the process directly to thisarchive.

• Compressed Archive – values from an existing archive are taken according toa principle defined by you and are written to this compressed archive.

In addition, you use tag assignment to specify which tags are to be written to thearchive. You must specify the required properties for each tag in a subsequentstep.

The archives you create in Tag Logging can be found on the "Measured ValueArchives" tab in the project object view of the SIMATIC Manager.

Page 167: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-3

9.2.2 Properties of Tags for an Archive

You must now assign properties, such as tag name and archive cycle, to tags thatyou assigned to an archive when you created it with the Archive Wizard or tags thatyou assigned subsequently to an archive. To enable quick editing of theseproperties, you define them in the process object view of the SIMATIC Manager,which displays all tags and their associated properties in a table.

The default acquisition type is "cyclic-continuous." This means that archiving iscarried out in defined cycles.

9.2.2.1 Overview of an Archive Configuration Steps

You configure an archive in the "Tag Logging" editor in WinCC.

Overview of Configuration Steps

Step Action

1 Create a new archive

2 Define properties for the archive

3 Configure the archive

4 Specify properties for the tags

9.2.2.2 Step 1 – How to Create a New Archive

1. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editors > Tag Logging > Open menucommand.The "Tag Logging" editor opens.

2. In the navigation window, select the "Archives" object, open the shortcut menu,and select the "Archive Wizard..." menu command.The "Create Archive" wizard opens.

3. On the start page of the wizard, click "Next."

4. In step 1, make the following entries:

- Enter the name of the archive in the "Archive Name" field.

- Activate the option button for the required archive type.

5. Click "Next."

6. In step 2, click "Select..."This opens the Tag Selection dialog.

7. Select the required tag.If you want to select more than one tag, press the "CTRL" key and select therequired tags.

Page 168: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-4 A5E00164212-01

8. Click "OK."The tag selection dialog closes, and all selected tags are entered in the field.

9. If you want to insert additional tags, click "Select" again and select additionaltags.

10. When you have selected all tags, click "Apply."The archive is created and displayed in the detail window. All selected tags aredisplayed in the table.

11. Create additional archives, if necessary. To do so, repeat steps 2 through 10.

9.2.2.3 Step 2 – How to Define Properties of an Archive

Requirement

You have opened the "Tag Logging" editor and created an archive with therequired tags.

Proceed as follows …

1. In the detail view, select the archive for which you want to define propertiesand select the Edit > Properties menu command.

If … … Then ...

You select the Process Value Archive The "Process Value Archive Properties"dialog opens –

and the "General" tab is displayed

You have a Compressed Archive The "Compressed Archive Properties"dialog opens –

and the "General" tab is displayed

2. Define the archive parameters.For more information, refer to WinCC Help.

3. Switch to the "Memory Location" tab and define the memory location.

4. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The dialog closes and the "Tag Logging" editor is displayed.

5. Select the File> Save menu command.This saves your archive settings.

6. If you have created additional archives, define the properties for all archives.To do so, repeat steps 1 through 5.

Page 169: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-5

9.2.2.4 Step 3 – How to Configure Archives

Requirement

You have already opened the "Tag Logging" editor and defined the tags to bestored in this archive.

Proceed as follows …

1. Select the "Archive Configuration" object in the navigation window.The archive types "TagLogging Fast" and "TagLogging Slow" will be displayedin the detail window.

If the Acquisition Cycle Is… … Select Archive Type

Less than one minute, TagLogging Fast

Greater than one minute, TagLogging Slow

2. In the detail window, select the required entry and then select the Edit >Properties menu command.The"TagLogging Fast" or "TagLogging Slow" dialog will open, and the "ArchiveConfiguration" tab will be active.

3. Set the archive parameters.

- Size of the overall archive

- Size and time of individual segments – subareas of the archive

Additional information on this tab can be found in WinCC Help.

4. Switch to the "Backup Configuration" tab.

5. Select the "Backup" check box.

6. Click the "Browse" button next to the "Destination Path" input field and selectthe directory in which the archive backup is to be saved.

7. If required, specify an alternative destination path. If the archive backup cannottake place in the default destination path, it will automatically be saved in thealternative destination path.

8. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.You have now completed the settings for your archive.

Page 170: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-6 A5E00164212-01

9.2.2.5 Step 4 – How to Define Tag Properties

Tag properties are defined in the process object view of the SIMATIC Manager.

Requirement

The following requirements must be satisfied:

• The "Tag Logging" editor must be closed

• PCS 7 OS must be closed

Proceed as follows...

1. Open the SIMATIC Manager, and select the process object view.

2. Switch to the "Measured Value Archives" tab.The data in the measured value archives are updated and displayed in a table.You can edit all fields with a white background.

3. In the "Filter by column" drop-down list, select the "Name of archive" entry.

4. In the "Display" input field, enter the name of the archive for which you want todefine the tag properties.The display is updated in accordance with the filter.

5. Define the following essential properties:

- Tag name

- Acquisition cycle

- Archive/display cycle

6. If necessary, define additional properties.

Page 171: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-7

9.3 Archive Values in Process Pictures

9.3.1 Overview of Displaying Archive Values in Process Pictures

In addition to archiving "in the background," PCS 7 has a function for displayingarchive values in process pictures, thus allowing the plant operator to evaluateparticular process values quickly.

Apply the following trend displays:

• Online Trend Control – displays process values over time

• Function Trend Control – displays the relation between two process values.

9.3.2 Trend Display and Configuration in Runtime

During process operation, the values are displayed in the form in which youconfigured them in the Graphics Designer. The plant operator has the option ofusing the toolbar to work with the trend display. The following operations can beperformed:

• Show/hide trend displays

• Scroll through displays

• Add area to trend displays

In addition, the plant operator can assemble additional new trend displays directlyduring process operation and view the measured values of measuring points intrend displays. To do this, the plant operator must have the relevant userauthorization.

You will find information about trend displays during process operation in theProcess Control System PCS 7, Runtime manual.

Page 172: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-8 A5E00164212-01

9.4 Working with the Online Trend Control

9.4.1 Function of Online Trend Control

In the Graphics Designer, you can use the dynamic "Online Trend Control" objectto configure trend displays of measured values. These trends are displayed duringprocess operation, thus enabling the plant operator to carry out a quick opticalcheck of a measured value characteristic: He can quickly identify whether a one-way trend is developing in the measured values and use this information to takethe necessary actions in time.

The trend diagram is displayed as follows:

• The x-axis is automatically the time axis

• The y-axis is the value axis. Depending on how many trends you want tocreate in one display, more than one y-axis can be displayed side-by-side..

9.4.2 Tag Connection in Online Trend Control

You can create trends for the following tags:

• Tags from an archive – this enables you to view tags that you have also writtento the archive you created in the "Tag Logging" editor.

• Tags directly from the process, the so-called "online" tags – these tags allowyou to view a measured value directly during process operation. Thismeasured value is displayed for the plant operator, but is not saved to anarchive.

9.4.2.1 Configuration Steps for Online Trend Control

Use the following procedure to configure the Online Trend Control:

Step Action

1 Insert an Online Trend Control in the Graphics Designer

2 Define the properties for the Online Trend Control in the GraphicsDesigner

Note

When configuring the Online Trend Control, if you switch directly from step 1 tostep 2, the "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog has fewer tabs thanif you reopen the dialog.

Page 173: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-9

9.4.2.2 Step 1 – How to Insert an Online Trend Control

1. Open the required picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If you cannot see the "Object Palette" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and activate the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette opens.

3. In the Object Palette, toggle to the "Controls" tab.

4. Select "WinCC Online Trend Control."

5. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The mouse cursor will turn into a small control icon.

6. Holding the mouse button down, drag to form a square that corresponds to thesize you want your trend display to have.The "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog opens.

7. Click "OK" to close the "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog.You define the properties in step 2.

9.4.2.3 Step 2 – How to Define an Online Trend Control

Requirement

You have already inserted the "Online Trend Control" object.

Proceed as follows …

1. Double-click the "WinCC Online Trend Control" object.The "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog opens, giving youaccess to all of the tabs to define properties for the window.

2. First, go to the "General" tab and in the "Data Source" drop-down list, selectthe type of tag you want to show in the trend display.

If… … Select

You want to display measured values froman archive you have created in Tag Logging

"Archive Tags"

You want to display measured valuesdirectly from the process

"Online tags"

3. In the "General" tab, you also configure the settings for the windowappearance, for example, window title and axis definition.

Page 174: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-10 A5E00164212-01

4. Switch to the "Trends" tab to define and format the trend you want to display ina diagram.You can find information on creating new trend displays in WinCC Help.

5. Click "Selection."

If … … Then

You want todisplay archivetags

The "Archive/Tag Selection" opens.

1. In the navigation window, select the required archive andselect the required tag in the detail window.

2. Click "OK" to apply your selection.

You want todisplay onlinetags

The "Tag Configuration" dialog opens.

1. Enter the tag name in the "Tag Name" input field or clickthe "Browse" button next to the input field to open the tagselection dialog.

2. Click "OK" to accept the tag.

6. Go to the other tabs to make additional settings for the window appearance, forexample, fonts, toolbar buttons, and settings for the time and value axes.

7. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The dialog is closed.

8. Select the File > Save menu command to save the process picture.

Page 175: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-11

9.5 Working with the Function Trend Control

9.5.1 Function of the Function Trend Control f(x)

Compared to Online Trend Control, Function Trend Control provides a majoradvantage:

• Function Trend Control can represent the relation between two differentprocess values:the required process values can be represented on both the x-axis and the y-axis and are then displayed as a trend, such as a "Pressureversus Temperature" trend. When you select process values to be representedon the x and y axes, it is important that the process values to measured atapproximately the same time.

• With Online Trend Control, time is represented on the x-axis so that thecharacteristic of a process value can be observed over time.

Function Trend Control can display at least eight different trends with a maximumof 10,000 value pairs.

Requirements

In Function Trend Control, only cyclic-continuous tags can be represented. When avalue pair from an archive is displayed, both archive tags must have the samearchiving conditions: both tags must have the same cycle.

Moreover, only tags from the archive of one server can be loaded for an axis pair.

Actual and Setpoint Trend

For each trend displayed in Function Trend Control, an associated setpoint trendcan be configured. A setpoint trend is a static curve representing the setpointcharacteristic of process values so that the user can quickly compare the actualvalues to the setpoint values. Like the actual trend, the setpoint trend displays a tagon the x-axis and a tag on the y-axis. Both tags must come from the same userarchive.

Values for trends are provided from the following archives:

Trend with Actual Values Trend with Setpoint Values

• User archive

• You select the Process ValueArchive

• "Online Tags"

User archive

Page 176: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-12 A5E00164212-01

9.5.2 Tag Connection in Function Trend Control

The properties of Function Trend Control provide several options for connectingtags to the function.

• Archive tags – Values that you write to an archive you created in Tag Loggingcan be displayed with the Function Trend Control.

• Online tags – Tags are read and displayed directly from the process.

• User archive – Values that are written to a user archive can also be displayedduring runtime. For this to be possible, you must first have created the requireduser archive with the "User Archives" editor.

Note

The "User Archives" editor is not included in the "PCS 7" standard package. Youneed a separate license for this editor.

9.5.2.1 Configuration Steps for Function Trend Control

Use the following procedure to configure the Function Trend Control:

Step Action

1 Configure the setpoint trend

2 Insert a Function Trend Control in the Graphics Designer

3 Define the properties for the Online Trend Control in the GraphicsDesigner

9.5.2.2 Step 1 – How to Configure a Setpoint Trend

If you want to display a setpoint trend in the Function Trend Control, you mustconfigure it beforehand. The values for a setpoint trend are stored in a userarchive.

The steps are summarized below. You will find detailed information on working withuser archives in WinCC Help and in the SIMATIC HMI, Options manual.

1. In WinCC Explorer, open the "User Archives" editor.

2. Create a new user archive and give it an intuitive name.

3. Define the following two fields:

- Setpoint value for the x-axis

- Setpoint value for the y-axis

Page 177: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-13

4. Use the Edit > Runtime Data menu command to activate the table field, andenter the setpoint values.

5. Save the user archive.

Note

Alternatively, you can import the values for the setpoint trend from the AS.

9.5.2.3 Step 2 – How to Insert a Function Trend Control

1. Open the required picture in the Graphics Designer.

2. If you cannot see the "Object Palette" toolbar, select the View > Toolbarsmenu item and activate the "Objects" check box in the "Toolbars" dialog.The Object Palette opens.

3. In the Object Palette, toggle to the "Controls" tab.

4. Select "WinCC Function Trend Control."

5. Use the mouse to move to the workspace.The mouse cursor will turn into a small control icon.

6. Holding the mouse button down, drag to form a square that corresponds to thesize you want your trend display to have.The "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog opens.

7. Click "OK" to close the "Properties of WinCC Online Trend Control" dialog.

9.5.2.4 Step 3 – How to Define a Function Trend Control

Requirement

You have already inserted the "Function Trend Control" object.

Proceed as follows …1. Double-click the "WinCC Function Trend Control" object.

The "Properties of WinCC Function Trend Control" dialog opens, giving youaccess to all of the tabs to define properties for the window.

2. Define the settings for the Function Trend Control display in the following tabs:

- "Curves"

- "General"

- "Font"

- "Toolbars"

- "y-axis"

- "x-axis"

- "Limit Values"

Page 178: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-14 A5E00164212-01

3. If you want to display a setpoint trend:

- Switch to the "Curves" tab and select the "Setpoint Trend" check box.

- Click "Properties" and select the required user archive as the source.

- Make additional settings relating to the appearance of the setpoint trend.

4. Switch to the "Data Connection" tab and configure the data connection settingsfor the different trends.Depending on your selection, the relevant areas will be activated in the dialogfor you to make additional settings.

If… … Then, Select the following from the"Provider" Drop-Down List

You want to display measured valuesfrom an archive you have created inTag Logging

"Archive Tags"

You want to display measured valuesdirectly from the process

"Online tags"

You want to display setpoint trends ordata from a user archive

"User archive"

5. Click "Select" next to the relevant fields to select the tags/archives:

If You HaveSelected

… Then...

"Archive tags" The "Selection of Archives/Tags" area is activated

Proceed as follows:

1. Click the "Browse" button next to the "x-axis" and "y-axis"input fields.This opens the "Selection of Archives/Tags" dialog.

2. In the navigation window, select the required archive andselect the required tag in the detail window.

3. Click "OK" to apply your selection.

"Online tags" The "Selection of Archives/Tags" area is activated

Proceed as follows:

1. Click the "Browse" button next to the "x-axis" and "y-axis"input fields.This opens the "Tag Configuration" dialog.

2. Enter the tag name in the "Tag Name" text box or click onthe "Browse" button next to the text box to open the tagselection dialog and select a tag.

Page 179: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-15

If You HaveSelected

… Then...

"User archive" The "User Archive" area is activated.

Proceed as follows:

1. Click the "Browse" button next to the "Source" text box.This opens the "Package Browse" dialog.

2. In the navigation window, select the required archive andselect the required tag in the detail window.

3. Click "OK" to apply your selection.

6. Click "OK" to save your inputs.The dialog closes and the Graphics Designer is displayed.

7. Select the File > Save menu command to save the process picture.

Page 180: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-16 A5E00164212-01

9.6 Using Alarm Logging

9.6.1 Message Archiving in Alarm Logging

Make the following settings in the "Alarm Logging" editor:

• The properties for the long-term archive

• The properties for the short-term archive. This is where you specify if and howmany messages are to be loaded back into the message list and displayedfollowing a power failure.

9.6.1.1 How to Configure Archives in the Alarm Logging

RequirementYou have already opened the "Alarm Logging" editor.

Proceed as follows …1. Select the "Archive Configuration" object in the navigation window.

The archive types "Long-term archive" and "Short-term archive" will bedisplayed in the detail window.

2. In the detail window, select the entry "Long-term archive" and then select theEdit > Properties menu command.The"Alarm Logging" dialog will open, and the "Archive Configuration" tab willbe active.

3. Set the archive parameters.

- Size of the overall archive

- Size and time of individual segments – subareas of the archive

Additional information on this tab can be found in WinCC Help.

4. Switch to the "Backup Configuration" tab.

5. Select the "Backup" check box.

6. Click the "Browse" button next to the "Destination Path" input field and selectthe directory in which the archive backup is to be saved.

7. If required, specify an alternative destination path. If the archive backup cannottake place in the default destination path, it will automatically be saved in thealternative destination path.

8. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.You have now completed the settings for your long-term archive.

9. If you wish to load the most recent messages back into the message listfollowing a power failure, mark the "Short-term archive" entry in the detailwindow and select the menu command Edit > Properties.The "Archive” dialog field opens.

10. Activate the "Reload Message ListAfter Power Failure" check box and enter the number of messages to bereloaded in the "Number of Messages" field.

Click on the "OK" button to save your settings.

Page 181: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-17

9.7 Using the Report Designer

9.7.1 Reports with the Report Designer Overview

The Report Designer provides functions for creating and outputting reports. TheReport Designer includes several standard layout settings. These standard layoutshave an "@" sign in front of the name. You can customize the existing layouts to fityour needs. The Report Designer provides the editors you will need for thispurpose.

Reports are already created in the SIMATIC Manager in exactly the same way asfor process pictures.

Notice

Be sure to save your customized layouts under a new name.

9.7.2 Layouts in the Report Designer

The Report Designer has two layouts:

• Line layout

• Page layout

Line Layout

This layout gives you the option of sequentially printing out all messages createdduring process operation. This means that as soon as a message is generated, it isprinted out on the connected printer.

You use the Line Layout editor to input the required layout specifications, forexample, number of rows and columns per page and width of the individual rows.You make a selection to specify which message blocks from Alarm Logging shouldbe printed out.

Because this function is used during process operation, you must specify in WinCCExplorer that the "Message Sequence Report" application is to be startedautomatically when the computer is started up.

You can find information on this topic under "Configuring OS Data in the PCS 7OS, Computer Properties".

Page 182: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-18 A5E00164212-01

Page Layout

As with process pictures in the Graphics Designer, dynamic objects linked toassociated applications are used in the page layout. These objects are supplieddynamically with current data when they are printed out. For each page layout, youmust generate an associated print job and assign it to the page layout.

You can modify this layout with the Page Layout editor. This editor is comparableto the Graphics Designer: the Object Palette provides static and dynamic objectsthat you can insert in the layout. The dynamic objects are linked to applications. Inaddition, you can define a cover sheet and back page for each layout.

Consult the SIMATIC HMI, WinCC Volume 1/2 manual to obtain information on thedifferent dynamic objects available in the Report Designer and how to connectthese objects to the required applications.

Print Job

You must define a print job for each layout. Standard prints jobs are provided for allstandard layouts. When you define your own layout, you must always define anassociated print job.

Consult the SIMATIC HMI, WinCC, Volume 1/2 manual to obtain information onstandard line layouts, page layouts, and print jobs in PCS 7.

9.7.3 Reports in the Report Designer

Several types of reports are available in the Report Designer. For each report type,you use one of the Report Designer layouts:

• Message sequence report – line layout

• Archive and user reports – page layout

Message Sequence Report

You can create a message sequence report in the Report Designer. To do so,create a line layout and select the message blocks you wish to record in AlarmLogging. Once the line layout has been linked to a print job, the messagesequence report is available during process operation.

The message sequence report is output on an LPT interface of the operatorstation:

• A line printer prints out each message as soon as it comes in.

• A laser printer saves the messages and prints out an entire page.

Consult the SIMATIC HMI WinCC manual, Volume 1/2 to obtain more informationon the Report Designer and how to create layouts.

Page 183: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 9-19

Archive and User Reports

This report type is based on the page layout. You can define the layout appearancein a configuration dialog. You specify the output printer and any backup printers inthe associated print job.

Various events are used to control the output of an archive and user report. Thefollowing outputs are possible:

• Cyclical output, for example, once a month

• Output by clicking a button configured for this purpose

• Output whenever a process tag is modified

Page 184: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Archiving Options

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station9-20 A5E00164212-01

Page 185: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-1

10 Downloading a Project and ConfiguringChanges

10.1 Meaning of the Server Data

10.1.1 Generating and Downloading Server Data

The so-called server data include all important information for the OS clients.These server data are automatically generated when the OS server is compiled.You must download these server data for all OS clients in the Engineering System.All OS clients that access data of multiple OS servers require server data of all OSservers with which they "cooperate."

The server data are stored in a special file. The name of the file has the followingstructure:

[Name of Project]_[Name of Server].pck

If you want to set up so-called server-to-server communication in your project, youmust also download server data to an OS server.

Information on this can be found in "Using Server-Server Communication – UsingServer-to-Server Communication".

10.1.1.1 How to Download Server Data

The following steps apply when downloading the server data both to an OS clientand an OS server.

1. Open SIMATIC Manager and select the component view.

2. In the tree structure, select the entry "SIMATIC PC Station/WinCC ApplicationClient/[Name of OS Client or OS Server]," and select the Edit > Open Objectmenu command.The PCS 7 OS is displayed.

3. Select the Editors > Server Data > Loading… menu commandThe "Open" dialog is displayed.

4. Select the following folder:"../[Project path]/wincproj/[Name of OS Server]/[Name of ESComputer]/Packages"The *.pck file contains the required server data.

Page 186: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-2 A5E00164212-01

5. Select the file and click "Open."The download operation starts and the message "Server data weredownloaded successfully!" appears after a successful download operation.

6. Click "OK" in the message window.The downloaded file with the server data is displayed in the detail window.

7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 for all OS clients and OS servers that require server data.

10.2 Downloading and Activating a Project

10.2.1 Overview of a Project Download

You must transfer the data you configured to the various OS servers and OSclients before you can put a project into process operation.

You have two options for doing this in PCS 7:

• Complete download – This function must always be used for the first downloadoperation or after making extensive changes such as upgrading the plant toinclude an additional AS. You can also download this change using the"Download changes" function, but the download operation takes only slightlyless time. Note that the OS must be stopped when performing a completedownload.

• Download changes – This function is used after making minor changes. Thisfunction has two major advantages:

- The OS can remain in process operation

- The download operation takes significantly less time

10.2.2 Requirements for Complete Download

Before you can download a project to the OS servers and activate it, you musthave completed the following actions:

• Create and download the hardware configuration in HW ConfigInformation on this can be found in the Process Control System PCS 7;Engineering System configuration manual.

• Configure and download the network connections in NetProInformation on this can be found in the Process Control System PCS 7;Engineering System configuration manual and in Configuring PCS 7 OS Datain SIMATIC Manager > Configuring the Communication Paths > ConfiguringNetwork Connections for a PCS 7 OS.

• Configure the hardware components in the Component Configurator

• Configure the ES, including, for example, creation of continuous function charts(CFC) and sequential function charts (SFC) in SIMATIC ManagerInformation on this can be found in the Process Control System PCS 7;Engineering System configuration manual.

Page 187: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-3

• Download the ES data to the ASsInformation on this can be found in the Process Control System PCS 7;Engineering System configuration manual.

• Compile the OS without error messages

• Configure the OS, including, for example, creation of process pictures andreportsInformation on this can be found in the Process Control System PCS 7;Engineering System configuration manual.

• Download the server dataInformation on this can be found in "Downloading a Project and ConfigurationChanges – Significance of Server Data."

10.2.3 Background Information on Compiling and Performing aComplete Download

A project is downloaded in SIMATIC Manager using the central "Compile anddownload objects" function. PCS 7 provides the "Compile and Download Objects"dialog for this. The display of objects in this dialog corresponds to the componentview in SIMATIC Manager, that is, it displays all SIMATIC PC stations you havecreated in SIMATIC Manager. Here, you make all required settings for compilingand downloading in a central location. In addition, you specify in this dialog whetherthe entire project or individual operator stations are going to be compiled anddownloaded.

Special Considerations when Downloading Single-User Systems

If the OS and ES are to be operated on one computer, you do not have to performa download operation because all required data are already present.

Special Considerations when Downloading Redundant Operator Stations

If the OS is redundant, you can first stop one OS, download it, and reactivate theOS while the other OS remains in runtime mode. You then download the secondOS while the first one remains in runtime mode. In this way, you do not have toshut down the entire plant.

Page 188: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-4 A5E00164212-01

Procedures during Compile and Download Operations

During compile and download operations, the following procedures take place inthe background:

• Server data are automatically generated for the associated OS clients.

• Computer names for operator stations are automatically changed to the namesof the target OS.

• Objects are automatically downloaded in the correct sequence.

• During the compile and download operation, a detailed log of all individualsteps is created, which you can open after completion of the function.

Note

After making comprehensive changes during complete download, make sure theWinCC Explorer of the OS server is started or that the OS server is in processoperation when booting up the OS client and that all network connections areactive to enable the OS client save all changed server data automatically.

Storing Pictures and Scripts

The placement of pictures and scripts is dependent on whether an OS clientaccesses one or more OS servers as follows:

• For OS clients that access multiple OS servers, scripts and pictures areautomatically copied into particular directories on the OS client:

- Pictures: \...\GraCS

- Scripts: \...\Library

• For OS clients that access only one OS server, scripts and pictures are locatedonly on the OS server.

Page 189: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-5

10.2.4 Background Information on "Download Changes" Function

Requirements

In order for you to be able to use to "Download Changes" function, you must havecompiled and downloaded the entire project once.

Important Information on Downloading Changes

Caution

Under no circumstances should you make changes directly on the PCS 7 OS, asthis would prevent you from being able to use the "Download Changes" functionand would require you to perform a complete download.

Notice

The Operator Station must be in process operation.

Notify the plant operator that he may not run the operator station while the"Download Changes" function is being executed.

Note

There is a temporary data inconsistency between AS and OS data while"Download Changes" is being executed.

For this reason, you should first download the modified data to the PLC beforedownloading data to the OS. This reduces the length of the data inconsistency.

Procedures when Downloading Changes

The server data are automatically updated by the "Download Changes" function.The OS clients automatically receive the current data after the download operation,so that the server data do not have to be explicitly downloaded.

Downloading Changes and Redundancy

For safety reasons, the redundant server is not downloaded at the same time.Rather, the OS master is downloaded initially. The OS master is not downloadeduntil download of the redundant server is complete.

Page 190: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-6 A5E00164212-01

10.2.5 Overview of Changes

Below is an overview of where you can make changes that can be transferred withthe "Download changes" function.

• Project – Plant View

• Project – Component View

• Charts

• Blocks and block instances

• Changes in WinCC Explorer

10.2.6 Changes in Project – Plant View

You can download the following changes in the plant view without having to stopthe OS:

• Insertion of a folder in the plant view

• Relocation of a folder to the plant view

• Copying of a folder to the plant view

• Renaming and deleting of a folder in the plant view if it is a component of theplant designation

• Renaming of the picture for the OS

• Subsequent activation of the "Base Picture Hierarchy on Plant Hierarchy"setting

• Renaming of the OS area

• Changing of the plant hierarchy level for the OS area

• Changing of the AS assignment and passing the change on to all lower-levelobjects

• Changing of the OS assignment and passing the change on to all lower-levelobjects

• Renaming, insertion, deletion, and changing of pictures

• Renaming, insertion, deletion, and changing of reports

Page 191: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-7

10.2.7 Changes in Project – Component View

You can download the following changes in the component view without having tostop the OS:

• Renaming, insertion, relocation, and deletion of the AS

• Renaming, insertion, relocation, and deletion of the S7 program

Note

When deleting a AS or an S7 program, tags and links are not removed until acomplete compile with memory reset is performed.

• Renaming and insertion of a PC station

• Renaming and insertion of a WinCC application

• Insertion and deletion of an OS

Note

Compile and download are performed separately for each OS.

10.2.8 Changes in Charts

You can download the following changes to charts without having to stop the OS:

• Renaming, insertion, and deletion of "Charts" folders

• Renaming, insertion, deletion, and modification of continuous function charts

• Renaming, insertion, deletion, and modification of sequential function charts

Page 192: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-8 A5E00164212-01

10.2.9 Changes in Blocks and Block Instances

The following changes to blocks and block instances can be downloaded withouthaving to stop the OS:

• Renaming of "Source Files" and "Blocks" folders

• Insertion and deletion of a block

• Renaming of a block in the symbol table

• Modification of a block address in the symbol table

• Modification of a block number in the block folder

• Modification of control and monitoring attributes of blocks

• Modification of control and monitoring attributes of a block instance

• Renaming, insertion, and deletion of block instances in continuous functioncharts

• Modification of message texts

• Modification of block interfaces of a block type, for example, addition ordeletion of a name, data type, or inputs/outputs

Notice

The AS must be stopped to make this change

10.2.10 Changes in WinCC Explorer

This table presents only the settings in WinCC Explorer that must also beconfigured in the PCS 7 environment. Settings specified by PCS 7 are not listedhere.

• Configuration of archives – Tag Logging

• Configuration of reports – Report Designer

• Programming of script – Global Script

• Editing of Text Library

• Setting of user authorizations

• Configuration of user archives

• Setting of time synchronization

• Setting of lifebeat monitoring

• OS project editor

• Horn signal

• Changes in process pictures and associated scripts

• Change of SFC display properties

Page 193: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-9

10.2.11 Changes Requiring the OS To Be in STOP mode

In certain cases, you lose the option of executing the "Download Changes"function.

Notice

After the following changes are made, you can no longer use the "DownloadChanges" function. The "Download Changes" function becomes available againonly after you have performed a complete download operation.

• Changing the name of the OS

• Complete compilation of the OS

• Implementing the "Compress" option in the "Compile OS" wizard

• Changing the path to the target computer

• Changing the Master OS – Standby OS assignment

• Changing the configuration of redundant systems

• Changing from a multi-user station to a single-user system by deleting OSclients

• Changes to the project properties of the PCS 7 OS

• Changes to hot keys in the PCS 7 OS

As soon as you perform one of the actions above, PCS 7 opens a messagewindow to notify you that it is no longer possible to download changes if the actionis performed.

10.2.11.1 How to Download Multiple Operator Stations

If you want to perform the "Complete Download" or "Download Changes" functionon multiple operator stations, use the "Compile and Download Objects" dialog. Theprocedure is described below:

1. Open SIMATIC Manager, and select the component view.

2. Select the multiproject, and select the PLC > Download and Compile Objectsmenu command.The "Compile and Download Objects" dialog is displayed, which displays allobjects according to the component view.

3. Click the plus sign to display the lower-level objects.

4. In the "Download" column, clear the check boxes for all operator stations thatyou do not want to download.

5. In the tree structure, select which OS you want to download.The "Edit" button is activated.

Page 194: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-10 A5E00164212-01

6. Click "Edit."

If … … Then:

You selected an OS server "Compilation Settings for OS Server" dialog isdisplayed.

Make the necessary settings in the individual steps,and click "Apply" to apply your settings.Information on this can be found in "Configuring thePCS 7 OS Data in SIMATIC Manager – CompilingOS Data – How to Compile Multiple OperatorStationsha_proj_sim_uebersetzen".

The "Settings for Make" dialog is displayed

You selected an OS client "Settings for Make" dialog is displayed.

7. In the "Settings for Make" dialog, set the path to the target OS computer, ifnecessary.By default, this dialog displays the path that you set in the object properties forthis OS.

8. In the "Settings for Make" dialog, select the path to the target OS computer, ifnecessary.By default, this dialog displays the path that you set in the object properties forthis OS.

9. Specify the following options:

If … … Then

You want to download the entire project to thetarget computer

Select the"Entire WinCC Project" option.

You configured changes and want to downloadonly those changes

Select the"Changes" option.

Note

Once you have performed the "Complete Download" function one time, the"Changes" option button is automatically selected to prevent you frominadvertently performing a complete download operation.

10. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.

11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 for all other operator stations you want to download.

12. Click "Start" to start the download process.A progress bar will show you the current status of the download process.

Page 195: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 10-11

10.2.11.2 How to Download a Single OS

The "Complete Download" and "Download Changes" functions for a single OS areperformed the same way in principle. Proceed as follows:

1. In the component view or plant view of the tree structure in the SIMATICManager, select the object you want to download and select the PLC >Download menu command.The "DlgDownload" dialog opens.

2. Define the scope of data you want to download:

If … … Then:

You want to download theentire OS

Select the "Entire WinCC Project" option

You want to download changes Select "Changes"

Note

Once you have performed the "Complete Download" function one time, the"Changes" option button is automatically selected to prevent you frominadvertently performing a complete download operation.

3. Click "OK" to download.

10.2.11.3 How to Activate a Project

Requirement

The OS software must be installed on the operator station you want to use forprocess operation:

If... … Then:

You want to install a stand-aloneproject

You must select the OS Stand-Alonesoftware option when installing PCS 7

You want to install an OS server You must select the OS Server softwareoption when installing PCS 7

You want to install an OS client You must select the OS Terminal softwareoption when installing PCS 7

Page 196: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Downloading a Project and Configuring Changes

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station10-12 A5E00164212-01

Activating OS-Servers and OS Clients

1. Select the Start > Simatic > WinCC >WinCC Control Center 6.0 menucommand.The WinCC Explorer is displayed.

2. Select the File > Open menu command.

3. Navigate in the file system to the".../[Project path]/[Name of OS]" folder containing the associated *.mcp file, andclick "Open."This opens the project.

Note

The project is automatically opened each time the WinCC Explorer is opened.

4. Select the File > Activate menu command.This sets the project to runtime.

Page 197: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-1

11 Time Synchronization andLifebeat Montioring

11.1 Setting the Time Synchronization

11.1.1 Overview of Time Synchronization

Evaluation of process data requires that all components of the process controlsystem work with the same time, thus enabling messages to be assigned in acorrect time sequence, irrespective of the time zone from which they originate. Forexample, an OS server must assume the function of time master, such that allother operator stations and automation systems on the plant bus receive the timefrom this master. In this way, they all have the same time.

A process control message is generated as soon as an error occurs in the timesynchronization.

Time Master and Time Slave

To ensure that the time will be synchronized, time synchronization must beconfigured for each operator station.

In time synchronization, a distinction is made between time master and time slave:

• Time masterOS servers are generally specified as time masters. In a time master, there aredifferent functions: the "active time master" and the "passive time master." Theactive time master sends time message frames to the time slaves and thepassive time masters. If the active time master fails, a passive time master canfunction as an active time master at any time.

• Time slaveOS clients and automation systems are specified as time slaves. They receivethe time message frames and use them to set their internal clocks. Becausethe time is sent as a rule in GMT, the OS client is capable of converting GMT tolocal time, which is then displayed for the plant operator during processoperation.This ensures that data from different time zones can be displayedsimultaneously on an OS client.

Page 198: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-2 A5E00164212-01

11.1.2 Operation with Local Winter Time and GMT

In PCS 7, GMT is used as a rule within the plant. Time-related information that isdisplayed for the plant operator during process operation is converted from GMT tothe corresponding local time.

This makes it possible to configure a system, for example, with the automationsystem in a different time zone than the operator station. If necessary, the plantoperator can also switch back and forth between GMT display and local timedisplay during runtime.

For operator stations, it must be specified in WinCC Explorer whether local wintertime or GMT is to be used.

• GMT is the default setting in Version 6.0 and higher. The time master receivesits time from the DCF77 or GPS time service, or from SICLOCK TM or aWindows 2000 domain controller.

• Projects that were created with Version 5 still operate with local winter time.For these projects, the local time stored in Alarm Logging and Tag Logging areconverted to GMT.

Mixed Operation

Mixed operation is not supported. That is, all automation systems within a plantoperate either with local winter time or with GMT. GMT is mandatory for any plantconfiguration that extends across several time zones.

11.1.2.1 How to Set the Time System

1. In WinCC Explorer, select "[name of computer]" in the navigation window.The corresponding computer will be displayed in the detail window.

2. In the detail window, select "[name of computer]" and then select the Edit >Properties menu command.The "Computer Properties" dialog is displayed, and the "General" tab is active.

3. Switch to the "Parameters" tab.

4. In the "Time Setting for PLC" area, activate the required option box.

If … … Then:

You want to set the time for Version 5.xprojects

Select the "PLC is set to local winter timeall year" option

You want to set the time for Version 6.0projects

Select the "PLC is set to CoordinatedWorld Time (UTC)" option

Page 199: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-3

5. In the "Time base for time display during runtime" area, select the required timemode from the drop-down list. The time zone is only important for displayduring process operation. Internally in archives, for example, GMT is usedexclusively:

If: … Then

You want to set the time formigrated projects

Select "Server's Time Zone (migratedprojects)"

You want to set local winter time Select "Local time zone"

You want to set GMT Select "Coordinated World Time (UTC)"

6. Click "OK."

11.1.3 Using the Different Buses

The setting for time configuration must be made at all operator stations. This isdone via both buses in a plant. The bus used depends on the type of timesynchronization:

• Terminal bus – OS clients receive their time via terminal bus, and in a Windows200 domain, the domain controller can send the time to the OS server that iscurrently functioning as time master.

• Plant bus – OS server CPs that are currently functioning as passive timemasters receive their time via the plant bus. At the same time, the automationsystems are synchronized via the plant bus.

11.1.4 Time Synchronization via Terminal Bus

The terminal bus connects OS clients to OS servers. In certain networkconfigurations, the terminal bus can also connect the remaining company network.

In the PCS 7 environment, you will use the following two settings for the terminalbus to assign parameters for time synchronization:

• The "Use the time from a connected WinCC server" option is important for thetime synchronization of OS clients: All OS servers on the terminal bus for whichthe OS client has downloaded server data can act as time masters for an OSclient. OS clients have only simple network cards. They cannot send or receivetime message frames; instead, they query the time from the OS server in fixedcycles.

Page 200: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-4 A5E00164212-01

• The "Use the time from a specific computer" option is important for timesynchronization of OS servers. The computer names input in this casecorrespond to the computer names of the domain controllers in theWindows 2000 network. By default, the OS server receives the time fromcomputer 1. If this domain controller fails, then the OS server receives the timefrom the second, redundant domain controller.

The "Let time be set by external (third party) components" option is not applicablein the PCS 7 environment.

11.1.5 Time Synchronization via Plant Bus

OS servers and automation systems are connected to the plant bus. As a rule, allOS servers are specified as time masters, so that every OS server acting as apassive time master can become an active time master in the event of a timerfailure. All automation systems are basically time slaves.

Time synchronization via the plant bus requires one of the following interfaces:

• CP1613

• 3com network card in combination with BCE software

The interfaces provide the following options:

• Sending and receiving of time message frames

• Saving of time

• Configuration as time master or time slave

11.1.6 Options for Time Synchronization

PCS 7 has two basic options for setting up time synchronization:

• Time synchronization via an external timer, such as SICLOCK

• Time synchronization via a domain controller as a "timer"

Page 201: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-5

11.1.7 Time Synchronization via an External Timer

Notice

Time synchronization via the plant bus with an external timer is only implementedif the computers do not belong to a Windows 2000 domain and a domaincontroller is not available.

When external timers are used, OS servers become either active or passive timemasters:

• If the timer, for example a GPS or DCF77 unit, is connected directly to theOS server via an interface, the OS server automatically becomes an activetime master, and all other OS servers become passive time masters.

• If the timer, such as SICLOCK, and the OS servers are directly connected tothe plant bus, the OS servers become passive time masters. If the SICLOCKtimer fails, an OS server assumes the function of active time master.

OS clients receive the time from an OS server via the terminal bus. However,OS clients can only receive the time from OS servers from which they havedownloaded server data.

11.1.7.1 How to Synchronize via an External Timer

Requirement

You must have activated the "Time Adjustment" option in the configuration consolefor a CP of the OS server. This CP will then save the time of the external timer.

OS-Server

1. Open the OS server.

2. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editor > Time Synchronization > Open menucommand.The "Time Synchronization" dialog is opened.

3. Select the "Synchronization via plant bus (master, slave)" option.

4. In the "Access point 1" drop-down list, select the required CP.This drop-down list displays all CPs that are available in the OS server. Youmust select the CP for which you have activated time synchronization in theconfiguration console.

5. Select the "Master" option.The OS server is now specified as the time master.

Page 202: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-6 A5E00164212-01

6. If you are using a redundant CP, select the required CP for "Access point 2"and select the "Master" option.This specifies a redundant CP for the time synchronization.

7. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.

OS Client

1. Open an OS client

2. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editor > Time Synchronization > Open menucommand.The "Time Synchronization" dialog is opened.

3. Select the "Synchronization via the terminal bus (slave)" option.This activates all associated option boxes and input fields.

4. Activate the "Use the time from a connected WinCC server" option.

5. Click "OK" to confirm your entries.

11.1.8 Time Synchronization via Domain Controllers

Notice

Time synchronization via a domain controller as the timer can only beimplemented if the computers do not belong to a Windows 2000 domain and adomain controller is available. In this case, an external timer may not be used.

When a domain controller is used as a timer, all OS servers must be specified astime masters. The first OS server to ramp up that does not find any time messageframes on the plant bus automatically becomes the active time master. All otherOS servers then become passive time masters.

The domain controller receives its own time from a GPS or DCF77 unit. The activetime master obtains the time from the domain controller via the terminal bus. ThisOS server passes this time to its own CP. The CP can then synchronize all otherCPs with their associated OS servers via the plant bus.

In addition, all CPs and automation systems on the plant bus are synchronized viathe active time master.

OS clients then receive the time from an OS server via the terminal bus. However,OS clients can only receive the time from OS servers from which they havedownloaded server data.

Page 203: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-7

11.1.8.1 How to Synchronize via a Domain Controller

OS Server

1. Open an OS server.

2. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editor > Time Synchronization > Open menucommand.The "Time Synchronization" dialog is opened.

3. Select the "Synchronization via the terminal bus (slave)" option.This activates all associated options and text boxes.

4. Activate the "Use the time from a specific computer" option.

5. In the "Computer 1" text box, enter the first domain controller, and in the"Computer 2" text box, enter the redundant domain controller.You have now specified the domain controller that sends the time to the OSserver with the "Active time master" function.

6. Select the "Synchronization via System Bus (master, slave)" option.This activates the associated options and text boxes.

7. In the "Access point 1" drop-down list, select the required CP.

8. Select the "Master" option.

9. If you are using a redundant CP, select the required CP for "Access point 2"and select the "Master" option.The OS server is now specified as the time master.

10. Click "OK" to apply your entries.

OS Client

1. Open an OS client

2. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editor > Time Synchronization > Open menucommand.The "Time Synchronization" dialog is opened.

3. Select the "Synchronization via the terminal bus (slave)" option.This activates all associated options and text boxes.

4. Activate the "Use the time from a connected WinCC server" option.

5. Click "OK" to apply your entries.

Page 204: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-8 A5E00164212-01

11.1.9 Redundancy in Time Synchronization

Time synchronization can also be operated with multiple time masters, if required.This means that two or more time masters can be operated in a redundant system.The operator station equipped with DCF77/GPS automatically becomes the timemaster.

Notice

Only OS servers that are connected to the plant bus can be configured as timemasters.

Basic Functioning of a Redundant Time Master

As soon as an OS server that is specified as the time master is started, it mustcheck whether or not another time master is active, that is, it waits a specifiedlength of time to receive a time message frame. If it does not receive a timemessage frame, it begins to send time message frames over the network to theother masters and to all slaves. It thus becomes the active time master, and allother operator stations and automation systems on the network become slaves. Ifthis time master fails, another OS server takes over as time master. When theOS server equipped with DCF 77/GPS is recovered, it then reassumes the functionof time master.

Only one OS server can be entered as the time master, even in the case of OSredundancy.

You can find additional information about redundancy in the Process ControlSystem PCS 7, Fault-Tolerant Process Control Systems manual.

Page 205: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-9

11.2 Setting the Lifebeat Montioring

11.2.1 Overview of Lifebeat Monitoring

Lifebeat monitoring monitors all automation systems and operator stations in theprocess control system for functional competence: If an AS or an OS does notrespond to a monitoring request, a process control message is generatedimmediately.

Lifebeat MonitorLifebeat monitoring is executed centrally from an OS that has been designated asa so-called lifebeat monitor. The lifebeat monitor monitors all OS servers,OS clients, and all automation systems. All components to be monitored must beconnected to a common network and assigned to the lifebeat monitor. Monitoring isperformed in a particular cycle that you can define when configuring lifebeatmonitoring.

You configure lifebeat monitoring in the WinCC "Lifebeat Monitoring" editor.

Monitoring an Automation System

In an automation system, a process control message is generated in two situations:

• Lifebeat monitoring reads out the current operating mode from the automationsystems. If a mode transition, for example, from RUN to STOP, is detected, thelifebeat monitor generates a process control message.

• Lifebeat monitoring sends so-called monitoring requests to an AS. If, forexample, the power supply or the device fails, or if the connection isinterrupted, the AS cannot respond to the monitoring request, and a processcontrol message is generated.

Monitoring an Operator Station

Lifebeat monitoring of an operator station is performed via a monitoring request –as is the case for an automation system.

You will find a detailed description of how to configure lifebeat monitoring inWinCC Help under the keyword "Lifebeat Monitoring."

Page 206: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-10 A5E00164212-01

11.2.2 Display of Lifebeat Monitoring during Process Operation

Lifebeat monitoring is automatically activated when the OS is started up, and isexecuted for the OS in cycles of between 5 seconds and 1 minute.

An error message is displayed as follows:

• A process control message is generated as soon as lifebeat monitoring detectsa component failure.

• In addition, the status of all monitored components is displayed in a separatepicture that can be called by the plant operator via a button in the keyset. Acomponent that has failed is displayed in this picture with a line runningthrough it. In addition, the picture contains supplemental information in textform, such as "faulty," "server has failed," or "server connected."

The remedying of an error is also displayed in a process control message.

11.2.2.1 How to Configure Lifebeat Monitoring

Requirements

• The hardware configuration and network connections for all automationsystems and operator stations must already be configured in theSIMATIC Manager.

• An OPC connection must be set up in WinCC Explorer.For more information, refer to WinCC Help.

Proceed as follows …

1. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editor > Lifebeat Monitoring > Open menucommand.This opens the "Lifebeat Monitoring [name of OS]" dialog.

2. Click "Add."This inserts a new row in the "Device List" table.

3. Double-click the field in the "Device Name" column and enter a unique, intuitivedevice name, such as the plant name for the component from the planthierarchy that you created in the SIMATIC Manager.

4. Double-click the field in the "Device Type" column and select the device to bemonitored from the drop-down list:

If… … Then

You want to implement CPU 4xx, Select "AS-4xx"

You want to monitor an OS Select "OS"

5. Double-click the field in the "Connection" column.This displays all S7 programs you created in the SIMATIC Manager whenconfiguring the ES.

Page 207: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 11-11

6. In the drop-down list, select the program associated with the AS you want tomonitor.You have already made this setting in the SIMATIC Manager.

7. Repeat steps 2 and 5 if you want to monitor additional components.

8. In the "Monitoring Cycle" area, select the cycle time during which lifebeatmonitoring should be executed during process operation.

9. Click "Update."At the bottom of the dialog, a preview is displayed of the picture that can beviewed by the plant operator during process operation.The "@CONFIG.PDL" picture, which can be called by the plant operator duringprocess operation, is generated in the background.

10. Click "Close" to save your inputs.

Page 208: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Time Synchronization and Lifebeat Montioring

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station11-12 A5E00164212-01

Page 209: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 12-1

12 Using the Server-to-Server Communication

12.1 Using Server-to-Server Communication

PCS 7 provides a special function called server-to-server communication. Thisfunction is particularly relevant for the following two applications:

• Tags of various OS servers are displayed on an OS client in one processpicture, whereby the process picture is stored on the OS server.

• A central archive is used for archiving process data using Tag Logging.

12.2 Server Spanning Tag Connections

12.2.1 Interconnecting Tags of Different OS Servers

You have the option to interconnect tags of different OS servers in a processpicture and to display the tags on the OS client.

To be able to use this function, you must take the following into account duringconfiguration:

• In the plant hierarchy, a plant must only be displayed on exactly one OS serverand this setting must be passed on to all lower-level folders, that is, lower-levelhierarchy folders must not be linked to other OS servers.

• When tags are interconnected in the Graphics Designer, only "WinCC tags"may be used as the data source for the tags.

The following guidelines apply when the server data are downloaded:

• The OS client requires the server data of all OS servers from which it is goingto display data, such as process data or picture data.

• The OS server on which a picture is configured that uses tags of otherOS servers requires the server data of the OS server that has tags it is going todisplay.

Page 210: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station12-2 A5E00164212-01

12.2.2 Example Configuration for Tag Connection

The figure below contains the schematic representation of an example project. Thisproject will be used as an example for illustrating the required configuration stepsto better explain the relationships:

Techn. view Componentview

Plant1

Unit 11

Unit12

OS server1

CFC 11

Picture11

Plant 2

Unit 21

Unit 22

OS server2

CFC 21

Picture 21

OS server1

OS server2

OS client1

AS 2

AS 1

Information on the picture:

• Plant 1 is assigned to OS Server 1.

• Plant 1 contains the process picture "Picture 11," in which a server-internal tagconnection and a tag connection overlapping all servers will be made:

- Tag from CFC 11 of Plant 1 – server-internal

- Tag from CFC 21 of Plant 2 – server-overlapping

• Plant 2 is assigned to OS Server 2.

• Plant 2 contains the process picture "Picture 21," in which only server-internaltag connections will be made.

Page 211: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 12-3

12.2.2.1 How to Configure Pictures with Different Tags

Requirements

• OS server and OS clients are created

• Path to the target OS is established

• AS-OS assignment is made

Perform these steps...

1. In SIMATIC Manager, configure all ES data, such as continuous function charts(CFC) and SFC charts.

2. Select the OS > Compile menu command and compile OS Server 1 and OSServer 2.This generates the required server data.

3. Open OS Server 1, and download the server data of OS Server 2.The server-overlapping tag connection to OS Server 2 can only be performed ifthe server data of OS Server 2 are downloaded.

4. Open Picture 11 in the Graphics Designer.

5. Make the tag connection as follows:

- The tag connections to CFC 11 are made in the usual way, that is, using"ES variables" as the data source and selecting tags in the plant hierarchy.

- Tag connections to CFC 21 are made differently:Data source is "WinCC Tags" and selection is made in the following folder:"WinCC Tags/ [Name of Server Data]/ SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite/[Connection]/ S7 Program"

Notice

Use only this data source.

6. Configure the process picture "Picture 21" in the usual way.

7. In the SIMATIC Manager mark OS Server 1 and select the menu commandOptions > OS > Compile.

8. Make the following settings in the "Compile OS" wizard for the step "Select thedata you want to compile and the scope of compilation":

- Deactivate all option boxes in the "Data" area

- Activate the "Changes" option box the "Scope" area

9. Select the project in SIMATIC Manager, and select the PLC > Compile andDownload Objects menu command.

Page 212: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station12-4 A5E00164212-01

10. Make the settings for the download operation for the "OS Server 1" and "OSServer 2" objects, and download the data of OS Server 1 and OS Server 2 tothe target station.

Note

Select the "Entire WinCC project" option.

11. Open OS Client 1, and download the server data of OS Server 1 andOS Server 2.

12. Download the data of OS Client 1 to the target station.

12.3 Using an Archive Server

12.3.1 Configuring a Central Archive Server

A central archive server does not have a process connection and is only used forarchiving data using Tag Logging. The archive server receives process data fromthe OS servers during runtime. The OS clients display the following different typesof data in a process picture:

• Process data – The OS client receives these data directly from the OS servers.

• Archive data – The OS client receives these data from the archive server.

The following must be taken into account when configuring a central archive:

• Which operator stations need which server data

• The required sequence for the individual configuration steps

Page 213: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 12-5

12.3.2 Example Configuration for an Archive Server

The figure below shows a plant configuration with a central archive server. Thisplant configuration will be used as an example for illustrating the requiredconfiguration steps to better explain the relationships:

OS server OS serverOS server

Archiveserver

OS client OS client OS client

1

5

6

4 4

66 6

1 OS server data, whose process value requires archiving

2

3

4

5

6

Tag connection only via the OS server data

Server data from the archive server to the OS server, which access the archive tags

Configuration of the process pictures with variable connection

Server data of the archive server to all OS clients , which must displaythe archive data in the process pictures

Server data of all OS servers to OS clients

3

2

Page 214: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station12-6 A5E00164212-01

12.3.2.1 How to Configure an Archive Server

Requirements

• PCS 7 project is created and configured

• The "Compile OS" function is performed for all OS servers, such that all serverdata have been generated

• Server data are downloaded to all OS clients

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. Create a new PC station in the component view in SIMATIC Manager.This PC station is configured as an archive server.

2. Open HW Config and insert the WinCC application in the usual way.

3. Open the object properties of the archive server in SIMATIC Manager andspecify the "Target OS" path.

PCS 7 OS – Archive Server

1. Open the archive server in SIMATIC Manager.This starts the PCS 7 OS.

2. Download the server data from the OS servers containing the process valuesto be archived.Server data can be found in:"..\[Name of Project]\ wincproj\ [Name of OS Server]\ [Name of ES Computer]\Packages\*.pckAll of the tags required for the tag connection are now available in the tagmanagement.

3. Open the object properties of the computer, switch to the "Startup" tab, andactivate the following applications:

- "Alarm Logging Runtime" – This automatically activates "Text LibraryRuntime" as well.

- "Tag Logging Runtime"

4. Deactivate all other applications.

5. In the "Tag Logging" editor, create the required archive and link the archive tothe archive tags.

Notice

Use the following data source:"WinCC Tags/ [Name of Server Data]/ SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite/ [Connection]".

Page 215: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 12-7

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. In SIMATIC Manager, select the OS archive server and select the OS >Compile menu command.This generates the server data that you subsequently need for the OS servers.

Notice

Make sure that an S7 program is not assigned to the archive server.

PCS 7 OS – OS Server

Notice

The following work steps are required only for the OS servers that access data ofthe archive server. Only these OS servers require the server data of the archiveserver.

1. Open the OS server.

2. Download the server data of the archive server to the OS server.All archive tags of the archive server are now available to the OS server.

3. Configure all of the pictures in which archives or archive tags are used, forexample, for use of Trend Controls.

4. If necessary, delete existing archives, since archives are always storedcentrally on this archive server when an archive server is used.

5. Open the object properties of the computer, switch to the "Startup" tab, anddeactivate the "Tag Logging Runtime" application.This application is not required for the OS servers, since they do not performarchiving.

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. Select the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Select the PLC > Compile and Download Objects menu command.

3. In the "Compile" and "Download" columns, select the check boxes for thefollowing OS servers:

- All OS servers with tag connection to the archive server

- Archive server

Page 216: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station12-8 A5E00164212-01

4. Make the settings for the compile and download operations for all objects.

Note

Do not forget to set the "Changes" option for compiling to reduce the compilingtime.

5. Click "Start."This downloads the data to the target OS server and generates the server datafor the OS clients.

6. Open the OS client.

7. Download the server data of the archive server.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all other OS clients.

9. Select the PLC > Compile and Download Objects menu command.

10. In the "Download" column, select the check boxes for all OS clients and makethe settings for the download operation.

11. Click "Start."This downloads the data to the target OS clients.

12.3.2.2 How to Configure Changes for an Archive Server

Requirements

• PCS 7 project is created and configured

• The "Compile OS" function is performed for all OS servers, such that all serverdata have been generated

• Server data are downloaded to all OS clients

• OS server, archive server, and OS clients are in process operation

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. Make the changes to the ES configuration, for example, addition of newmeasuring points.

2. Compile the associated OS servers – This generates the associated serverdata.

Page 217: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 12-9

PCS 7 OS – Archive Server

1. Open the archive server – this automatically updates the server data of theassociated OS server.

2. In the archives of the "Tag Logging" editor, connect the additional archive tagsfrom your modified configuration.

Notice

Use the following data source for this:"WinCC Tags/ [Name of Server Data]/ SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite/ [Connection]"

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. Select the archive server in SIMATIC Manager, and select the OS > Compilemenu command.

2. Select the "Changes" option.This compiles the changes and updates the server data that are required forthe OS servers.

PCS 7 OS – OS Servers

Notice

The following work steps are required only for the OS servers that access data ofthe archive server.

1. Open the OS server that has tag connections to the archive server.The OS server recognizes that the server data of the archive server have beenchanged and automatically downloads the server data again.

2. Configure the changes in all pictures.

Page 218: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using the Server-to-Server Communication

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station12-10 A5E00164212-01

SIMATIC Manager – Engineering System

1. Select the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Select the PLC > Compile and Download Objects menu command.

3. Select the following OS servers:

- All OS servers on which you have made tag connections to archive tags

- Archive server

4. Compile and download this server. Select the "Download changes" option.This downloads the data to the target OS server and generates the server datafor the OS clients. All of the OS clients in process operation receive theinformation about the updated server data and automatically reload these data.

Page 219: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 13-1

13 Using other Editors and Tools

13.1 Function and Use of the Text Library

13.1.1 Function of Text Library

The text library is a database containing all of the texts that the plant operator seesduring process operation. The texts are stored in all installed languages. Thisallows the text to be displayed in the language selected when a language switch ismade during runtime.

The following texts are stored in the Text Library:

• Process control and system message texts, such as synchronous AS errors

• Chart and block designations

• Message texts from the block instances

• Unit and operating texts

• Texts from process pictures

• Etc.

In the PCS 7 environment, the Text Library content is automatically filled when the"Compile OS" function is executed, thus eliminating the need for additional steps inthis editor.

Note

There is one exception when you will make changes in the Text Library:

If you want to ensure during process operation that the unit and operating textsare displayed in the process pictures in the language set by the plant operator,you must edit the respective languages.

Page 220: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using other Editors and Tools

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station13-2 A5E00164212-01

13.1.2 Relationship between "Compile OS" and Text Library

This relationship is important if changes have to be made in the Text Librarybecause you want to implement unit and operating texts in different languages.

The "Compile OS" function and the Text Library has the following relationship: thecolumn containing the language corresponding to the "Standard Language forDisplay Units" setting in SIMATIC Manager is always referenced in the Text Librarywhen the "Compile OS" function is executed.

Example:

For example, an operating text is specified as follows: "S7_String0 = Aus

• The "Standard Language for Display Units" setting in SIMATIC Manager isGerman: As a result, "Aus" is entered in all three columns of the Text Librarywhen the OS is compiled.

• In the Text Library, change "Aus" to "Off" in the column for English.

• Depending on the "Standard Language for Display Units," the following occurs:

If "Standard Languagefor Display Units" is:

… Then

German • "German" is the reference column

• "Aus" is already entered

• A new entry is not created

English • "English" is the reference column

• "Aus" is not entered – this entry has been changedto "Off"

• A new row is created – "Aus" is entered in thecolumns for all languages and the manualadjustments are lost

Important

Because the entries in the Text Library of WinCC Explorer are automaticallyentered by PCS 7, you need only make changes after adjusting the unit andoperating texts. When changes are made, be aware of the following:

Caution

When reexecuting the "Compile OS" function, you must not under anycircumstances change the "Standard Language for Display Units" in SIMATICManager. This can cause previously compiled entries to be overwritten.

Page 221: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using other Editors and Tools

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 13-3

13.1.2.1 How to Change the Unit and Operating Texts in theForeign Languages

Requirement

You have already performed the following steps in SIMATIC Manager:

• Adjusted unit and operating texts in the block types

• Adjusted unit and operating texts in the block instances

• Executed the "Compile OS" function

Proceed as follows …

1. In WinCC Explorer, select the Editors > Text Library > Open menucommand.The "Text Library" editor is displayed.

2. Select the Edit > Find menu command.

3. In the "Search for" field, enter the unit and operating text of the block type andclick "Find Next."The table field containing the specified term is displayed in the Text Library.

4. Enter the required translations in the foreign language columns.

5. Press the "Enter" key.This confirms the term.

6. If you want to translate several unit and operating texts, repeat steps 3 to 5.

7. Close the "Text Library" editor.

Note

Alternatively, you can edit the Text Library entries in an external program such asMS Excel. Proceed as follows:

1. Export data to a *.csv file using the File > Export menu command.

2. Edit the data.

3. Import the edited data using the File > Import menu command.

Page 222: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using other Editors and Tools

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station13-4 A5E00164212-01

13.2 Programming with Scripts

13.2.1 Function of Global Script

Global Script is the generic term for functions and actions that can be used within aproject or on a global project basis.

Global Script provides two programming languages:

• C Script

• VB Script

You can use both programming languages to perform the following:

• Actions and procedures not dependent on pictures – This programming isperformed in the Global Script Editor.

• Picture-dependent actions for making graphical objects dynamic – Thisprogramming is performed in the Graphics Designer.

VB and C scripts can be used simultaneously within a project or a process picture.However, you cannot call C scripts from VB scripts or vice versa

Detailed information on Global Script can be found in the SIMATIC HMI WinCC,Volume 2/2 manual and in WinCC Help.

13.2.2 Global Script – Programming with C Script

Programming with C script fulfils many tasks:

• PCS 7 provides preprogrammed standard and internal functions.

• You can formulate specific project and standard functions with C script.

• You can create actions that run in the background during process operation.

Notice

Note that actions are processed interpretively. If you use numerous or extensiveactions, you must therefore expect a higher system load. Moreover, many smallactions cause more system load than a few large actions. It is better to replaceextensive actions with separate Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs).

Move cyclic calculations to the AS and avoid executing them on the OS.

Detailed information about C programming within the framework of PCS 7 OS canbe found in the SIMATIC HMI WinCC, Volume 2/2 manual and in WinCC Help.

Page 223: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using other Editors and Tools

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 13-5

13.2.3 Global Script – Programming with VB Script

VB scripts are processed during process operation. You can use VB scripts toprogram operator control and monitoring functions.

Operator Functions

Operator functions enable the plant operator to access graphical objects and tagsduring process operation. Examples of operator functions are:

• Defining setpoints for tags

• Switching languages for a graphical object

Monitoring Functions

To facilitate process monitoring for the plant operator, you can use VB script toimplement displays such as the following:

• Display of cyclic operations through flashing or color changes

• Display of measuring point states, such as "Motor ON"

Detailed information about VB script can be found in WinCC Help.

13.2.4 Programming with VBA

You can use VBA to adapt the Graphics Designer to your own requirements inorder to simplify and automate the configuration process. VBA is integrated in theGraphics Designer. Examples of available options are:

• Creation of user-defined menus and toolbars for adapting the GraphicsDesigner interface to your individual requirements.

• Creation of VBA macros for mouse-activated configuration steps, for example,settings for levels and editing of objects. A VBA macro for editing objectsenables you to quickly create a large number of objects with identicalproperties.

For detailed information about VBA, refer to WinCC Help.

Page 224: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Using other Editors and Tools

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator Station13-6 A5E00164212-01

13.3 More Tools Overview

13.3.1 Additional Tools in PCS 7 OS

PCS 7 OS provides several additional tools, which are briefly introduced below.These are referred to as "Tools" in WinCC.

These tools are called from the Window taskbar using the following menucommand: Start > Simatic > WinCC > Tools > [Name of tool].

• Channel diagnostics tool – This tool is used for diagnostics of connections toOperator Stations.For more detailed information, refer to the Process Control System PCS 7,Service Support and Diagnostics manual.

• Communication configuration tool – This tool can be used to set parameters fornetwork communication.

• Scope – WinCC Scope helps you perform WinCC diagnostics over the Internet.A browser and a TCP/IP protocol are required.For more detailed information, refer to the Process Control System PCS 7,Service Support and Diagnostics manual.

Page 225: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 Index-1

Index

$$$BlockComment$$ .....................................3-35

**.pck .............................................................10-1

@@@PCS 7 Typicals .......................................7-4@Template.pdl...............................................7-5

AAcknowledging ...............................................8-8Activating....................................................10-12Active time master........................................11-1Actual trend ..................................................9-11Alarm..............................................................4-6Alarm control ..................................................7-9

inserting......................................................7-9Alarm Logging ............................... 8-3, 8-4, 9-16

message archiving ...................................9-16message numbers......................................8-4PCS 7.........................................................8-4SIMATIC Manager......................................8-4

Alarm system .................................. 8-1, 8-2, 8-3Alarm Logging ............................................8-3configuration...............................................8-1Project editor ..............................................8-2

Analog display (extended)......... 6-19, 6-20, 6-21configuring................................................6-20inserting....................................................6-20tag connection..........................................6-21using.........................................................6-19

Archive ...........................................................9-3acquisition types.........................................9-3tags ............................................................9-3

Archive report ...............................................9-18Archive server ................... 9-1, 12-4, 12-5, 12-6,

.............................................. 12-7, 12-8, 12-9configuring................................................12-6configuring changes .................................12-8plant configuration ....................................12-5

Archive tags .................................................9-13Archive Wizard ...............................................9-3Archives ..................... 5-5, 9-3, 9-4, 9-5, 9-6, 9-7

configuration steps .....................................9-3configuring..................................................9-5

creating...................................................... 9-3defining properties ..................................... 9-4defining tag properties ............................... 9-6process operation ...................................... 9-7user authorization ...................................... 5-5

Archiving........................................ 9-1, 9-2, 9-16Tag Logging............................................... 9-2

Area ............................................................... 4-6AS-OS assignment ...................................... 3-23

making ..................................................... 3-23AS-OS Assignment...................................... 3-22Attribute "type" ............................................... 7-4

BBasic data...................................................... 4-6Bit number ................................................... 6-16Block comments .......................................... 3-35Block icons.......................3-25, 3-26, 3-27, 3-28,

..............................................7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7@@PCS 7 Typicals ................................... [email protected] .......................................... 7-5attribute "type" ........................................... 7-4connecting to a measuring point ................ 7-7creating.................................. 3-25, 3-26, 3-28faceplates .................................................. 7-3function .................................................... 3-25inserting ..................................................... 7-7sequence for creating .............................. 3-26specifying creation ................................... 3-27specifying type ......................................... 3-27types .......................................................... 7-4updating................................................... 3-28use............................................................. 7-3

Block instance...................3-29, 3-32, 3-33, 3-37editing unit and operating texts ................ 3-32message priority ...................................... 3-37messages ................................................ 3-33unit and operating texts............................ 3-29

Block types .......................3-29, 3-30, 3-33, 3-37editing unit and operating texts ................ 3-30message priority ...................................... 3-37messages ................................................ 3-33unit and operating texts............................ 3-29

CC action ......................................................... 6-3Changes ..................10-5, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9

block instances ........................................ 10-8blocks ...................................................... 10-8charts ....................................................... 10-7

Page 226: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationIndex-2 A5E00164212-01

component view....................................... 10-7OS in STOP mode ................................... 10-9overview................................................... 10-6plant view................................................. 10-6WinCC Explorer ....................................... 10-8

Channel Diagnostic...................................... 13-6Chip card ....................................................... 5-4Commissioning wizard ................................... 3-3Commissioning Wizard .................................. 3-4Communication Configurator ....................... 13-6Compiling............................................ 3-40, 3-41

global settings.......................................... 3-41type of data .............................................. 3-41

Complete download .................10-2, 10-3, 10-10background information ........................... 10-3performing.............................................. 10-10requirements ............................................ 10-2

Component Configurator.............................. 3-14Compressed archive ...................................... 9-2Computer properties ............................... 4-3, 4-5

Graphics Runtime ...................................... 4-3keys ........................................................... 4-4language setting......................................... 4-4name of OS................................................ 4-3setting ........................................................ 4-5shortcut key................................................ 4-3starting applications ................................... 4-4window....................................................... 4-3

Configuration steps ..........................2-1, 2-2, 2-3Overview.................................................... 2-1SIMATIC Manager ..................................... 2-1WinCC Explorer ......................................... 2-3

Cross reference ........................................... 7-31Cross-reference lists 7-31, 7-32, 7-33, 7-34, 7-35

creating .................................................... 7-34making corrections................................... 7-35non-existent tags............................. 7-32, 7-33PCS 7 ............................................. 7-32, 7-33rewiring .................................................... 7-35switching to point of application ............... 7-34

Cyclic archive................................................. 9-1Cyclic-continuous........................................... 9-3

DData format .................................................... 9-2Data storage ................................................ 10-3DCF77 unit................................................... 11-5Diagnostics - lifebeat monitoring.................. 11-9Diagnostics - redundant

operator stations ............................... 3-6, 3-10Direct linking .................................................. 6-3Domain controller................................ 11-6, 11-7

performing time synchronization .............. 11-7Downloading .............................................. 10-11

single OS ............................................... 10-11Downloading changes.................................. 10-2Dynamic dialog .............................................. 6-3Dynamic objects..... 6-2, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9, 6-10, 6-12

bars............................................................ 6-7

block icon ...................................................6-8configuration steps .....................................6-8configuring................................................6-11control.........................................................6-7extended status display..............................6-7faceplate.....................................................6-8group display ..............................................6-7input/output fields .......................................6-7inserting......................................................6-9object properties.......................................6-12picture window............................................6-7standard objects .........................................6-7status display..............................................6-7status display (extended)............................6-7user object..................................................6-8user object template ...................................6-8user-created ...............................................6-8

Dynamic updating...........................................6-3

EEditor..............................................................1-2Editors ............................................. 4-2, 6-2, 8-9

block list editor............................................1-2Graphics Designer...............................1-2, 6-2Horn............................................................8-9Picture Tree Manager.................................1-2Tag Logging ...............................................1-2User Administrator......................................1-2

ES variables ...................................................6-5Event text .....................................................3-35Example configuration..................................12-2

overlapping tag connection.......................12-2Export ........................................ 7-21, 7-23, 13-3

Graphic Object Update Wizard.................7-23procedure .................................................7-23Text Library ..............................................13-3

Extended status display ...............................6-16making preparations.................................6-16status table ...............................................6-16VSTATUS.................................................6-16

External timer ...............................................11-5setting time synchronization .....................11-5

FFaceplate Designer ........................................7-6Faceplates................3-25, 7-2, 7-3, 7-5, 7-6, 7-8

block icon ...................................................7-3call ..............................................................7-2connecting an object ..................................7-8display types...............................................7-5editing.........................................................7-6group display ..............................................7-5loop display ................................................7-5storage .......................................................7-2structure type..............................................7-2

Filter ...............................................................6-5Function Trend Control.............. 9-11, 9-12, 9-13

configuration steps ...................................9-12

Page 227: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 Index-3

defining.....................................................9-13inserting....................................................9-13tag connection..........................................9-12

GGlobal Script.................................................13-4Global settings .......................... 3-15, 3-17, 3-18

OS area identifier .....................................3-19plant designation ......................................3-17plant hierarchy..........................................3-15

GMT .............................................................11-2Gone list .........................................................8-4GPS unit.......................................................11-5Graphic Object Update Wizard....................7-21,

.............................................. 7-23, 7-24, 7-27export .......................................................7-23import .......................................................7-23tag connection..........................................7-24updating ...................................................7-24using.........................................................7-27

Graphics Designer...................................6-2, 6-9objects........................................................6-2opening a picture........................................6-9overview .....................................................6-2

Graphics Runtime...........................................4-3Group display .................. 6-22, 6-23, 6-24, 6-25,

..................... 6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, 7-5, 7-37connecting to a measuring point...............6-25connecting to a picture ....................6-27, 6-28connecting to measuring points................6-26dynamic updating .....................................6-22group display hierarchy ............................7-37inserting....................................................6-23process operation............................6-22, 6-23specifying a picture selection ...................6-29

Group display hierarchy ...............................7-37calculating ................................................7-37

Group value..................................................7-13

HHardware configuration ..................................3-1

overview .....................................................3-1HID ............................................ 3-16, 3-17, 3-18

setting..............................................3-17, 3-18Horn .............................................. 8-7, 8-9, 8-10

configuring................................................8-10message class............................................8-9signal tag....................................................8-9

HW Config......................................................3-1

IImport ........................................ 7-21, 7-23, 13-3

Graphic Object Update Wizard.................7-23procedure .................................................7-23Text Library ..............................................13-3

Input/output fields .........................................6-21configuring................................................6-21

Instance ....................................................... 7-20user object template ................................ 7-20

JJournal........................................................... 8-4

KKeyword....................................................... 3-35

LLanguage for display units........................... 3-33Language setting ........................................... 4-3Layout............................................................ 4-6Lifebeat monitoring ................ 11-9, 11-10, 11-11

configuring ............................................. 11-10process operation .................................. 11-10

Line layout ................................................... 9-17Local winter time.......................................... 11-2Loop display................................................... 7-5

MMessage archiving....................................... 9-16Message class ............................................... 8-9Message lists ...................................8-4, 8-5, 8-6

"Gone" list .................................................. 8-4journal ........................................................ 8-4New list ...................................................... 8-4Old list........................................................ 8-4Operation lists............................................ 8-4Process list ................................................ 8-4properties................................................... 8-6sorting criterion .......................................... 8-5

Message number range............................... 3-37specifying................................................. 3-37

Message numbers ................................ 3-37, 8-4Message priority .......................... 3-37, 3-38, 8-8

message lists ........................................... 3-37signal tags.................................................. 8-8specifying................................................. 3-38

Message sequence report ........................... 9-18Message window ........................................... 7-9Messages ....................3-33, 3-34, 3-35, 8-2, 8-4

$$BlockComment$$ ................................ 3-35block comments....................................... 3-35configuring ............................................... 3-33event text ................................................. 3-35message lists ............................................. 8-4

Miscellaneous ................................................ 4-6Multi-user project ........................................... 1-4

NNameOfTag ................................................. 7-20NetPro ......................................................... 3-12Network connections ................................... 3-12

Page 228: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationIndex-4 A5E00164212-01

configuring ............................................... 3-13New list .......................................................... 8-4Non-existent tags......................................... 7-32

OOld list............................................................ 8-4Online tags................................................... 9-13Online Trend Control............................... 9-8, 9-9

configuration steps..................................... 9-8defining ...................................................... 9-9inserting ..................................................... 9-9tag connection............................................ 9-8

Operating texts............................................. 3-29Operation list.................................................. 8-4Operation messages...................................... 8-5Operator control and monitoring attributes... 3-16OS................. 3-6, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10, 3-42, 3-43, 4-2

compiling.................................................. 3-42compiling individually ............................... 3-42configuring ................................................. 3-6inserting ..................................................... 3-6properties................................................... 4-2setting properties ....................................... 3-9

OS area identifier ..............3-18, 3-19, 3-20, 3-39global settings.......................................... 3-19specific settings........................................ 3-19specifying................................................. 3-19updating ................................................... 3-39

OS client ........................................................ 1-3OS server.............................................. 1-3, 3-40

compiling.................................................. 3-40Overview of Time Synchronization............... 11-1

PPage layout.................................................. 9-17Passive time master..................................... 11-1PC station ...............................3-2, 3-3, 3-6, 3-14

checking configuration ............................. 3-14configuration ....................................... 3-2, 3-3modifying configuration ............................ 3-14

PCS 7 OS ...................................................... 1-1overview..................................................... 1-1

Picture............................................................ 6-9opening ...................................................... 6-9

picture hierarchyadopting ................................................... 3-21

Picture hierarchy................................. 3-20, 3-21Picture names..................................... 3-21, 3-22

specifying................................................. 3-21Picture objects ...........................7-21, 7-24, 7-33

export ....................................................... 7-21import.............................................. 7-21, 7-22updating ................................................... 7-24

Picture selection........................................... 6-29Picture Tree Manager .........3-20, 3-39, 5-2, 7-36

picture hierarchy ............................. 3-20, 3-21picture names .......................................... 3-21preventing changes.................................. 3-39

user authorization.....................................7-37Picture Tree Manger.......................................5-2

user authorizations .....................................5-2Picture window ....................................7-29, 7-30

using.........................................................7-29Pictures ........................................................3-24

inserting....................................................3-24Plant designation..........................................3-17

setting.......................................................3-17Plant Designation .........................................3-16Plant hierarchy ................... 1-1, 3-15, 3-20, 3-24

global settings ..........................................3-15Picture Tree Manager......................3-20, 3-21pictures.....................................................3-24process pictures .......................................3-24

Point of application .......................................7-34switching...................................................7-34

Points of application .....................................7-31Preparatory work ..........................................3-22Print job ........................................................9-18Process control messages .............................8-1Process list .....................................................8-4Process messages ..................................8-1, 8-5Process object view.............................7-31, 7-33

"Picture Objects" tab.................................7-33cross-reference lists .................................7-33

Process pictures............................ 3-24, 6-1, 7-1additional options .......................................7-1inserting....................................................3-24plant hierarchy..........................................3-24requirements ..............................................6-1

Process value archive ....................................9-2Project editor ...........................................8-2, 8-3

alarm system ..............................................8-2Project Editor...........................................4-6, 4-7

overview .....................................................4-6Project properties ....................................4-2, 4-3

setting.........................................................4-3Project types............................................1-3, 1-4

multi-user project........................................1-4overview .....................................................1-3redundant project .......................................1-4single-user project ......................................1-4

RRedundancy .................................................11-8

time synchronization.................................11-8Redundant project ..........................................1-4Report Designer ..................................9-17, 9-18

linelayout ..................................................9-17page layout......................................9-17, 9-18print job.....................................................9-17reports ......................................................9-18

Reports.........................................................9-18Runtime window.............................................4-6

Page 229: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationA5E00164212-01 Index-5

SScope...........................................................13-6Server data................................ 10-1, 10-2, 10-4

downloading .............................................10-1generating ................................................10-1

Server name.................................................7-20Server-to-server communication ..................12-1Setpoint trend............................ 9-11, 9-12, 9-13

configuring................................................9-12Shortcut keys ..........................................4-2, 4-4SICLOCK .....................................................11-5Signal module ................................................8-7

lifebeat monitoring ......................................8-7Signal tags ..............................................8-8, 8-9

message class............................................8-8message priority .........................................8-8

Signals ...........................................................8-8acknowledging............................................8-8

SIMATIC PC station .......................................3-6Single-user project .........................................1-4Sorting criterion ..............................................8-5Specific settings ............... 3-15, 3-16, 3-17, 3-18

operator control and monitoring attributes 3-16OS area identifier .....................................3-18plant designation ......................................3-17

Standard language for display unit ...............13-2Standard objects ..........................................6-12

overview ...................................................6-12Standby OS..................................................3-11Static objects..................................................6-2Status display......................................6-12, 6-13

configuring................................................6-13Status display (extended)...................6-14, 6-15,

.............................................. 6-17, 6-18, 6-19configuring................................................6-18import/export function...............................6-14inserting....................................................6-17overview ...................................................6-14tag connection..........................................6-19using.........................................................6-15

Status table ..................................................6-16STEP 7 tags ...................................................6-4Structure type.................................................7-2System message types ..................................8-5

operation messages ...................................8-5system messages.......................................8-5

System messages..........................................8-5

TTag ...............................................................7-20Tag connection............ 6-3, 6-4, 7-24, 12-1, 12-3

different OS servers .................................12-1making......................................................12-3modifying..................................................7-24tag selection dialog.....................................6-4

Tag name .....................................................7-20Tag selection dialog ................................6-4, 6-5

filter ............................................................6-4

tag source .................................................. 6-4Tag source..................................................... 6-4Tags............................................................... 6-6

storing........................................................ 6-6Target OS ........................................... 3-10, 3-11Template file ................................................ 7-19Text Library................................ 13-1, 13-2, 13-3

compiling OS ........................................... 13-2import/export............................................ 13-3

Time base.................................................... 11-2Time master................................................. 11-1Time slave ................................................... 11-1Time synchronization................ 11-1, 11-2, 11-3,

......................................11-4, 11-5, 11-6, 11-8domain controller ..................................... 11-6external timer ........................................... 11-5GMT......................................................... 11-2local winter time ....................................... 11-2plant bus ......................................... 11-3, 11-4redundancy .............................................. 11-8terminal bus ............................................. 11-3

Time system ................................................ 11-2setting ...................................................... 11-2

Tools............................................................ 13-6Trend display ................................................. 9-8

Online Trend Control ................................. 9-8Trend Display................................................. 9-7Type............................................................. 7-20

UUnit and operating texts ..................... 3-29, 3-30,

............................................... 3-31, 3-32, 13-3adapting.......................................... 3-29, 3-30block instance .......................................... 3-29block type................................................. 3-30block types............................................... 3-29changing in Text Library........................... 13-3editing ............................................. 3-30, 3-32

Unit texts...................................................... 3-29Update cycle .................................................. 4-2User Administrator ......................................... 5-1User archive................................................. 9-14User authorization.......................... 5-4, 5-5, 7-36

chip card .................................................... 5-4objects in the Graphics Designer ............... 5-5Picture Tree Manager ..................... 7-36, 7-37Tag Logging............................................... 5-5

user authorizations ........................................ 5-1User authorizations................................. 5-2, 5-6

archives ..................................................... 5-5PCS 7 ........................................................ 5-2Picture Tree Manager ................................ 5-2setting ........................................................ 5-6

User groups ................................................... 5-3User object................................................... 7-13

creating.................................................... 7-13User object template.................. 7-20, 7-25, 7-26

creating.................................................... 7-26properties................................................. 7-20

Page 230: Introduction to PCS 7 OS 2 3 Operator Station 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... · in SIMATIC Manager 3 Configuring the OS Data in PCS 7 OS 4 Setting the User Authorizations 5 Creating Process Pictures

Index

Process Control System PCS 7, Operator StationIndex-6 A5E00164212-01

User object templates ................7-19, 7-20, 7-21comparison to user objects ...................... 7-20Graphic Object Update Wizard ................ 7-21instance ................................................... 7-20instance name.......................................... 7-20template file.............................................. 7-19

User objects.....................7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-15,......................................7-16, 7-17, 7-18, 7-20advantages .............................................. 7-12application................................................ 7-12assigning property parameters................. 7-15comparison to user object templates ....... 7-20configuration steps................................... 7-13configuring ............................................... 7-14editing ...................................................... 7-18filing ......................................................... 7-16inserting ................................................... 7-17linking to a block ...................................... 7-16

storage .....................................................7-11User reports..................................................9-18Users..............................................................5-3

VVSTATUS.....................................................6-16

WWinCC Explorer.......................................4-1, 4-2

editors.........................................................4-2Help............................................................4-1PCS 7 .........................................................4-1

WinCC tags ....................................................6-5Window...........................................................4-4